DSLBD Office Fit Out - Broughton Construction Company

PROJECT MANUAL 

DSLBD Offices 

D G S 

Solicitation Number 

DCAM-13-CS-0155 

One Judiciary Square 

441 4th Street, NW 

8 th Floor 

Washington, DC 20001 

May 8, 2013 

OP●X 

a design solutions company 

Project Number 3191

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DGS 

DSLBD 

One Judiciary Square - Eighth Floor 

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Section 01 10 00 Summary 

Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 

Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 

Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 

Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 

Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 

Section 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures 

Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 

Section 01 42 00 References 

Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 

Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements 

Section 01 73 00 Execution 

Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 

Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 

Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 

Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition 

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 

Not Used 

DIVISION 4 MASONRY 

Not Used 

DIVISION 5 METALS 

Not Used 

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 

Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 

Section 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork 

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 

Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 

Section 08 12 16 Aluminum Frames 

Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors 

Section 08 42 26 All-Glass Entrances 

Section 08 70 00 Hardware 

Section 08 80 00 Glazing 

DIVISION 9 FINISHES 

Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 

Section 09 31 00 Tile 

Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 

Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 

OPX – Project No. 3191 TOC -1 of 2 05.08.13

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Section 09 68 13 

Section 09 91 00 

Carpet Tiling 

Painting 

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 

Not Used 

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 

Section 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 

Not Used 

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

Not Used 

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

Not Used 

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 

Not Used – See Notes on Engineering Drawings 

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 

Not Used – See Notes on Engineering Drawings 

APPENDIX A 

APPENDIX B 

SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 

SCHEDULE OF APPLIANCES 

END OF TABLE of CONTENTS 

DGS OJS DSLBD Page 2 of 2 05.08.13 

OPX – Project No. 3191

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other 

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 

2. Type of the Contract. 

3. Work under other contracts. 

4. Products ordered in advance. 

5. Owner-furnished products. 

6. Use of premises. 

7. Work restrictions. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary 

use of Owner's facilities. 

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Project Identification: DGS – One Judiciary Square 

1. Project Location: 441 4 th Street, NW Washington, DC 20001 Eighth Floor 

B. Owner: DC Government 

1. Owner's Representative: Hares Sayed 202.442.4991 hares.sayed@dc.gov 

C. Architect: OPX, 21 Dupont Circle NW, Washington, DC 20036, 

1. Contact: Ken Terzian, Principal 202.721.1686 kterzian@opxglobal.com 

D. Contractor: TBD 

E. The Work consists of the following: 

1. The Work includes demolition of existing interior tenant build out 8th floor, tenant modifications to the floor 

layout for two suites, ceiling, finishes, including carpet and interior architectural woodwork. See mechanical 

and electrical specifications for the work required. 

1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without 

interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed 

under separate contracts. 

1.5 USE OF PREMISES 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during 

construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other 

contractors on portions of Project. 

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. 

Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working 

hours, Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated or approved by the building management. 

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted 

under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to 

requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 

1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and 

CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the 

Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is 

incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the 

beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 

2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. 

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended 

meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. 

Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as 

the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as 

singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements 

expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or 

subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled 

indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. 

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a 

colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 

END OF SECTION 01 10 00 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Work Included: 

1. Schedule of Values 

2. Applications for Payment 

3. Change Order Procedures 

4. Allowances 

5. Alternates 

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Procedures: 

1. At least 15 days prior to first Application for Payment, submit to Architect a Schedule of Values 

allocated to various portions of Work. 

2. Prepare schedule in such form, and supported by such reasonable data to substantiate it. This 

schedule, unless objected to by Architect or Owner, shall be used only as a basis for Applications 

for Payment. 

B. Format: 

1. Schedule of Values shall in general follow sequence of sections in Specifications. Identify each line 

item with section number and title as listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 

2. In addition to line item costs of sections listed, list line item costs for each of following: 

a. Performance and Payment Bonds (when applicable) 

b. Contractor's fee 

c. Field supervision 

3. Prorate costs, such as costs of overhead, insurance, taxes, warranties and record drawings, 

through life of Contract. 

4. Estimated values of each principal category of Work shall, when added together, equal total 

Contract Sum. 

5. For each line item which has an installed value greater than $20,000, break down costs to list 

major products or operations under each item. 

1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Draft Applications: 

1. Prepare a draft copy of each application for review. 

2. Contractor and Architect shall schedule a "walk-through" of Project and review of draft 

approximately 3 days prior to submission of Application for Payment. 

3. Modifications and revisions made during review of draft shall be incorporated into Application for 

Payment. 

B. Format: 

1. Form to be used shall be AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment; including continuation 

sheets when required. 

C. Preparation of Applications: 

1. Present required information in a typewritten form or electronic media printout. 

2. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. 

3. Stored products may be included upon prior agreement and in accordance with criteria established 

by Owner. 

PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-1

4. Applications containing requests for materials stored on and off site, when approved by Owner, 

shall be accompanied by inventory lists with unit prices and supporting invoices and certificates of 

insurance. 

5. Using data from accepted Schedule of Values, provide a dollar value in each column for each line 

item for work performed and stored products. 

6. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on a continuation sheet, listing Change Order 

number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. 

D. Submittal Procedures: 

1. Submit Applications for Payment at intervals stipulated in Agreement. 

2. Submit 3 notarized original Applications for Payment, copies will not be acceptable. 

3. Provide partial lien waivers for that portion of Work covered by previous Applications for Payment. 

Provide notarized originals, copies will not be acceptable. 

1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. Submittals: 

1. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 

B. Documentation of Change in Contract Sum and Contract Time: 

1. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information 

required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in Work. 

2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of 

quotation. Provide data to support computations: 

a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment 

b. Taxes, insurance and bonds 

c. Overhead and profit 

d. Justification for change in Contract time 

e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented 

3. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with 

additional information: 

a. Origin and date of claim 

b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom 

c. Time records and wage rates paid 

d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented 

C. Change Procedures: 

1. Architect shall advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or 

Contract Time by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 

2. Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed 

change with supplementary or revised Drawings or Specifications. Contractor shall prepare and 

submit an estimate within 10 days, including a proposed change in Contract Time for executing 

change and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid. 

3. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing 

proposed change and full effect on Work, with a statement describing reason for change, and effect 

on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. 

D. Construction Change Directives: 

1. Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change 

in Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 

2. Document will describe changes in Work, and will designate method of determining change in 

Contract Sum or Contract Time. 

3. Promptly execute change in Work. 

E. Stipulated Sum Change Orders: 


1. Change shall be based on Proposal Request and Contractor's price quotation, or Contractor's 

request for a Change Order as accepted by Architect and Owner. 

F. Unit Price Change Orders: 

1. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price 

basis. 

2. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under a 

Construction Change Directive. 

3. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be computed as specified for Time and Material 

Change Order. 

G. Time and Material Change Orders: 

1. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits 

indicated in Conditions of Contract. 

2. Architect shall determine change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in 

Contract Documents. 

3. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. 

4. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for 

changes in Work. 

H. Correlation of Contractor Submittals: 

1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized 

Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum. 

2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect changes in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to 

adjust time for other items of work affected by change, and resubmit. 

3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 

1.05 ALLOWANCES 

A. General Requirements: 

1. Include in Contract Sum allowances stated in Project Manual. 

2. Designate in construction progress schedule, delivery dates for products specified under each 

allowance. 

3. Designate in Schedule of Values quantities of materials required under each unit cost allowances. 

B. Product Allowances: 

1. Each allowance shall include: 

a. Cost of products to Contractor, less applicable trade discounts 

b. Delivery to Site. 

c. Labor shall be required under allowances, only when labor is specified to be included in 

allowance. 

d. Applicable taxes 

2. In addition to amount of each allowance, include in Contract Sum, Contractor's costs for following: 

a. Handling at Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage. 

b. Protection from elements and from damage. 

c. Labor for installation and finishing, except where labor is specified to be a part of 

allowance. 

d. Other related expenses required to complete installation. 

e. Contractor's overhead and profit. 

3. Allowances shall be as specified in individual specification sections of Project Manual. 

C. Selection of Products: 

1. Architect's Duties: 

a. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products, suppliers, or installers. 

b. Make selection in consultation with Owner. Obtain Owner's decision designating 

following: 


i) Product, model and finish 

ii) Accessories and attachments 

iii) Supplier or installer as applicable 

iv) Cost to Contractor, delivered to Site, or installed as applicable 

v) Manufacturer's warranties 

c. Transmit Owner's decision to Contractor 

d. Prepare appropriate change order 

2. Contractor Duties: 

a. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers 

b. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect 

c. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect 

d. Notify Architect promptly of: 

i) Reasonable objections Contractor may have against supplier, or party under 

consideration for installation. 

ii) Effect on Construction Schedule anticipated by selections under consideration. 

D. Purchase, Delivery, and Installation: 

1. Upon notification of selection, execute a purchase agreement with designated supplier. Arrange 

for and process submittals as required. 

2. Make arrangements for delivery. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects 

and submit claims for transportation damage. 

3. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of Specifications. 

E. Adjustment of Costs: 

1. Should net cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, Contract Sum shall be 

adjusted accordingly by change order. 

a. Amount of change order shall recognize changes in handling costs at Site, labor, 

installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses, as applicable, caused by 

selection under allowance. 

b. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, unit cost shall apply to quantities 

actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by receipted invoices, or 

by field measurement. 

2. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at Site, or other expenses caused by selection 

under allowance within 30 days after execution of Work. 

3. Failure to submit such claims within designated time shall constitute a waiver of claims for 

additional costs. 



SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract 

modifications. 


1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for 

substitutions made after Contract award. 

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the 

ontract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that 

may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include 

supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to 

stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating 

cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of 

purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, 

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity 

relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor 

may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a 

complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract 

Sum and the Contract Time. 

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases 

and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but 

not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total 

float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires 

substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and 

Contractor on AIA Document G701. 

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. 

Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in 

a Change Order. 

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates 

method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change 

Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost 

and time adjustments to the Contract. 




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 

2. Project meetings. 


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's 

Construction Schedule. 

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and fieldengineering 

services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 

1.3 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure 

efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different 

Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one 

part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for 

required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum 

performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including 

mechanical and electrical. 

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. 

Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other 

construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. 

Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Preinstallation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

9. Project closeout activities. 

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to 

conservation of energy, water, and materials. 

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. 

Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required 

for proper performance of the Work. 

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and 

time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 

3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to 

everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time 

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference 

at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel 

assignments. 

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its 

superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. 

All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to 

the Work. 

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 

a. Tentative construction schedule. 

b. Phasing. 

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). 

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

j. Submittal procedures. 

k. Use of the premises and existing building. 

l. Work restrictions. 

m. Owner's occupancy requirements. 


n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 

o. Construction waste management and recycling. 

p. Parking availability. 

q. First aid. 

r. Security. 

s. Progress cleaning. 

t. Working hours. 

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. 

C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation 

of payment requests. 

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, 

and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of 

future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar 

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of 

significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether 

each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's 

Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure 

commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to 

ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

1) Review schedule for next period. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Off-site fabrication. 

5) Access. 

6) Temporary facilities and controls. 

7) Work hours. 

8) Status of correction of deficient items. 

9) Field observations. 

10) Requests for interpretations (RFIs). 

11) Status of proposal requests. 

12) Pending changes. 

13) Status of Change Orders. 

14) Pending claims and disputes. 

15) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been 

present. 

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where 

revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with 

the report of each meeting. 






SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction 

during performance of the Work, including the following: 

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

3. Submittals Schedule. 

4. Daily construction reports. 

5. Field condition reports. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the 

construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and 

finish times. 

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of 

costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are 

arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the 

critical path of Project. 

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that 

establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. 

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. 

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring 

Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion 

date. 

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the 

successor activity. 

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the 

planned Project completion date. 

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. 

H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. 

I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 

J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. 

K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as 

scheduled. 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 

2. Specification Section number and title. 

3. Submittal category (action or informational). 

4. Name of subcontractor. 

5. Description of the Work covered. 

6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 

B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 

1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values 

for cost-loaded activities. 

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire 

schedule for entire construction period. 

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with 

requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. 

D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated 

reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource 

loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and 

total float in calendar days. 

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if 

known. 

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by 

activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 

4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work until most 

recent Application for Payment. 

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. 

F. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 



A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with 

scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. 

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals 

Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper 

sequence. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE 

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction 

schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when 

establishing dates. 

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's 

Construction Schedule. 

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary construction schedule. Include submittals required 

during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and 

those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." 

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion 

date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. 

Comply with the following: 

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by 

Architect. 

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major 

items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle 

activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal 

Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with 

Submittals Schedule. 

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include proposed number of days for startup and testing for Owner’s and 

Architect’s review. 

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and 

allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 


D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in 

schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 

1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 

2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 

3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated 

in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 

4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in 

Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 

5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: 

a. Coordination with existing construction. 

b. Uninterruptible services. 

c. Use of premises restrictions. 

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the 

Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 

F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On 

the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 

1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 

2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to 

submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication 

and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning 

activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and 

demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 

3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. 

4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. 

G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a timeimpact 

analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 

2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date 

established for commencement of the Work. 

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a 

continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton 

diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) 

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. 

B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network 

analysis diagram for the Work. 

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later 

than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. 


a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor 

from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the 

schedule. 

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' 

personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate 

procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the 

schedule. 

C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary 

network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in 

relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: 

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. 

b. Mobilization and demobilization. 

c. Purchase of materials. 

d. Delivery. 

e. Fabrication. 

f. Utility interruptions. 

g. Installation. 

h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. 

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. 

Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, 

reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the 

limitations of the Contract Time. 

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float 

near the edges. 

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 

D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify 

critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 

2. Description of activity. 

3. Principal events of activity. 

4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 

5. Early and late start dates. 

6. Early and late finish dates. 

7. Activity duration in workdays. 

8. Total float or slack time. 

9. Average size of workforce. 

10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). 

E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 

2. Changes in early and late start dates. 

3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 

4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 


5. Changes in the critical path. 

6. Changes in total float or slack time. 

7. Changes in the Contract Time. 

F. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 

1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 

2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 

3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 

4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. 

a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" 

with total at bottom. 

b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 

2.5 REPORTS 

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning 

events at Project site: 

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 

2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 

3. Equipment at Project site. 

4. Material deliveries. 

5. Accidents. 

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 

7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 

8. Emergency procedures. 

9. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 

10. Change Orders received and implemented. 

11. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 

12. Services connected and disconnected. 

13. Equipment or system tests and startups. 

14. Partial Completions and occupancies. 

15. Substantial Completions authorized. 

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract 

Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed 

description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At biweekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction 

progress and activities. Issue schedule 3 days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or 

made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in 

logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. 


B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting 

agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. 

Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no 

longer involved in performance of construction activities. 



SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, 

Samples, and other submittals. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be 

rejected for not complying with requirements. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided only as base drawings by 

Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related 

activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be 

delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other 

submittals until related submittals are received. 

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list 

of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. 

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review 

shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of 

failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with 

subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must 

be delayed for coordination. 

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties 

is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record 

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name and address of Contractor. 

e. Name and address of subcontractor. 

f. Name and address of supplier. 

g. Name of manufacturer. 

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and 

then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix 

after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). 

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on 

submittals. 

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes 

noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be 

returned. 

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each 

submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than 

Contractor. 

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:. 

a. Date. 

b. Destination (To:). 

c. Source (From:). 

d. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 

e. Category and type of submittal. 

f. Submittal purpose and description. 

g. Specification Section number and title. 

h. Remarks. 

i. Signature of transmitter. 

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests 

for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from 

requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label 

information as related submittal. 

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 


3. Resubmit submittals until they are not marked "C, Revise and Resubmit." 

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, 

authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution 

on transmittal forms. 

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "A, Approved" or “B, Approved As Noted”. 

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES 

A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for 

Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 

1. Upon execution of Architect’s CADD Transfer Agreement Letter. 


2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 

1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or 

equipment. 

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, 

submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 

c. Standard color charts. 

d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

e. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 

f. Testing by recognized testing agency. 

g. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

h. Notation of coordination requirements. 

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

5. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return four 

copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on 

reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as 

applicable: 

a. Dimensions. 

b. Identification of products. 

c. Fabrication and installation drawings. 


d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 

e. Templates and patterns. 

f. Schedules. 

g. Design calculations. 

h. Compliance with specified standards. 

i. Notation of coordination requirements. 

j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

k. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

l. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets 

at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 

3. Number of Copies: Submit five opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation 

and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance 

manuals. Architect will retain one copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy 

as a Project Record Drawing. 

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with 

other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered 

and installed. 

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal 

package. 

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 

c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons 

throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of 

construction associated with each set. 

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the 

property of Contractor. 

4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to 

be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or 

product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples 

include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; 

small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, 

texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder 

will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, 

connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product 

represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate 

limits of variations. 

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 


A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 

1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return 

copies. 

2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality 

Requirements." 

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction 

Progress Documentation." 

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality 


D. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, 

indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is 

installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

E. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN 

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are 

specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific 

performance and design criteria indicated. 

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for 

additional information to Architect. 

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit five 

copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system 

specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. 

Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the 

Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to 

Architect. 

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, 

submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and 

statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract 

Documents. 

3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ ACTION 


A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them 

without action. 

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, 

and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate 

action taken, as follows: 

1. “A”, Approved 

2. “B”, Approved As Noted 

3. “C”, Revise and Resubmit 

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not 

comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. 

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. 

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 



SECTION 01 35 16 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work 

3. Transitions and adjustments 

4. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning 

5. Temporary partitions to allow building occupancy 

6. Waste management 

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Qualifications: 

1. Procedures and administration requirements of this section apply to all sections of specifications 

that are involved in alterations to building. 

2. Assign work of moving, removal, cutting, patching, and repair to trades so as to cause least 

damage to each type of work encountered, and to return building as much as possible to 

appearance of new work. 

3. Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in work of finish trade involved. 

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Unforeseen Conditions: 

1. Should unforeseen conditions be encountered that affect design or function of Project, investigate 

fully and submit an accurate, detailed, written report to Architect. 

2. While awaiting Architect’s response, reschedule operations if needed to avoid delay of overall 

Project. 

1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Work Sequencing: 

1. Access to occupied spaces shall be obtained through [Owner] [Building Manager] [Tenant] with a 

minimum of 72 hours notification. 

2. Work done in occupied spaces shall be left clean and neat, and free from dust accumulations. 

3. Jack-hammering, use of power actuator, hammer drilling, and other similar operations creating 

noises, odors, or fumes shall not be performed between hours of 8:00 AM and 6:00 PM. All 

operations creating conditions as indicated above shall cease sufficiently in advance of 8:00 AM to 

allow for clean up as necessary to allow use of spaces by Owner, public, and tenants where 

needed. 

B. Public Access: 

1. Public access to occupied spaces shall be maintained at all times during normal business hours. 

Provide protection for work in-place and safety of public during construction. 


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. New Materials: 

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16-1

1. Materials shall be as specified in other specification sections contained in this Project Manual. 

2. Match existing products and work as needed for patching and extending work 

B. Existing Products: 

1. Determine type and quality by inspection and testing of existing products where necessary, 

referring to existing work as a standard. 

2. Where a product or type of construction occurs in existing building, and is not specified as part of 

new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend, or match 

existing work. 

3. This specification will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor 

enumerate products that are not a part of new construction. Existing product is its own 

specification. 


3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 

1. Survey existing conditions and correlate with Drawings and Specifications to determine extent of 

removal needed. 

2. Verify that demolition and removal is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. 

3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work. 

4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation constitutes 

acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 

3.02 PREPARATION 

A. Protection: 

1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to 

provide for Owner occupancy. Maintain construction areas adjacent to occupied areas under 

sufficient negative pressure to prevent dust and debris from spreading to occupied areas. Return 

occupied areas to same as found or better level of cleanliness prior to securing Work for day. 

2. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of 

temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed 

areas. 

3. Protect remaining finishes, equipment and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting, moving, 

removal, and patching operations. Protect surfaces that will remain a part of finished work. Repair 

damages caused to facilities scheduled to remain without additional cost or delay to Owner. 

4. Protect existing and new work from weather and cold. Provide waterproofing, weather protection, 

heat or other facilities and protection to prevent damage to new work and to remaining work. 

5. Take steps as necessary to protect and minimize false alarms to building fire alarm and security 

systems. Coordinate false alarm protection efforts with building manager to maintain system 

function. 

6. Provide shoring and bracing needed to keep building structurally secure and free of deflection and 

for installation of new structural members. Increase or add new structural supports as needed by 

progress of work. 

7. Place roof walk boards over roof areas to protect roofing membrane. Fasten or attach roof 

protection boards to keep them from being blown off roof; do not harm integrity of roof. Protection 

shall be provided in such a manner as to completely protect areas subject to damage. 

B. Surface Preparation: 

1. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation work. Replace 

and restore following installation of new work. 


3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION 

2. Remove unsuitable materials, not indicated for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and 

deteriorated masonry and concrete. 

3. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. 

4. Replace, extend, or match materials as indicated for finished Work. 

5. Prepare surface and remove finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. 


1. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to 

accommodate Owner occupancy. 

2. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring 

products and finishes to [original] [specified] condition. 

3. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition 

for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 

4. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing systems to full 

operational condition. 

5. Install products as specified in individual sections. 

B. Reuse of Existing Materials: 

1. Save sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work or patch new work 

as needed. 

2. Do not incorporate used materials in new construction, except as specifically designated or where 

small quantities of finish materials that are difficult to match are used for patching or extending 

purposes. 

C. Transitions: 

1. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched 

work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make patch or transition 

invisible to eye from a distance of 4 feet (1200 mm). 

2. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate 

existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to 

Architect. 

3. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, re-work floors, walls, 

and ceilings to a smooth plane, without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 

4. At locations in existing areas where partitions are to be removed, patch floor, walls, and ceilings 

with new finish materials to match adjacent finishes. 

5. Where a change of plane of 1/4” or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth 

transition for Architect’s acceptance. 

6. Trim existing doors as needed to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as needed. 

D. Finishes: 

1. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. 

2. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be 

matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 


A. Repair of Damaged Surfaces: 

1. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing 

other imperfections to a condition equal to its condition at time Work was started. 

2. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 

3.05 CLEANING 


A. In addition to progress cleaning, clean Owner occupied areas of Work. 

B. As soon as Work in each area of alteration is complete, clean up surfaces, remove equipment, salvage and 

debris, and return areas to a good condition suitable for use by Owner as quickly as possible. 

3.06 WASTE MANAGEMENT 


1. Separate and recycle off-cuts and waste materials in compliance with Waste Management Plan and 

to maximum extent economically feasible. 

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. 

3. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. 

4. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated waste materials. Deliver to or arrange collection 

by individuals or organizations for verifiable reuse or re-manufacturing. 

B. Items listed below have unique or regulated disposal requirements and shall be removed and disposed of in 

manner dictated by law or in most environmentally responsible manner. Typical concerns are listed in 

parentheses: 

1. Fluorescent light ballasts manufactured prior to 1978. (PCB) 

2. Fluorescent lamps (Mercury) 

3. Refrigeration, air-conditioning, and other equipment containing refrigerants (CFC recovery) 

4. Batteries (Lead, acid, mercury) 

5. Paints, solvents, and other hazardous fluids 

6. Asbestos based materials 

7. Materials with lead based finishes 

C. Maintain an inventory of removed materials, and submit tracking forms for removed materials indicating type, 

quantities, condition, destination, and end use. 



SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 - 




2.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These 

services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the 

Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard 

products. 

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control 

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, 

Owner,or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work 

to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work 

to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. 

Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made 

under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, 

and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish 

the standard by which the Work will be judged. 

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance 

characteristics. 

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and 

materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to 

conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and 

compliance with industry standards. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or 

shop. 

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for 

completed Work. 

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the 

same as testing agency. 

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or 

Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and 

similar operations. 

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by 

accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not 

imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. 

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five 

previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and 

having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting 

requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer 

uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided 

or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may 

exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are 

minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision 

before proceeding. 


A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and 

experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a 

recognized authority. 

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 

1. Specification Section number and title. 

2. Description of test and inspection. 

3. Identification of applicable standards. 

4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 

5. Number of tests and inspections required. 

6. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 

7. Requirements for obtaining samples. 

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 


3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 

11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, 

inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, 

correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing 

on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual 

Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, 

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of 

successful in-service performance. 

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for 

this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to 

produce required units. 

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with 

a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where 

Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering 

services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those 

indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by 

entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated 

and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability 

to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional 

qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable 

to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation 

Program. 


H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is 

trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, 

design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with 

specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: 

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent 

delaying the Work. 

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualityassurance 

service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each 

report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and 

finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed 

Work. 

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.7 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a 

qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged 

and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to 

comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by 

Change Order. 

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, 

provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform qualitycontrol 

services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform 

these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will 

be performed. 


3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in 

duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are 

Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled 

components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as 

specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." 

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide 

quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply 

with the Contract Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architectand Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified 

personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during 

performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work 

complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service 

through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any 

portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control 

services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations 

to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist 

agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services 

with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and 

inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services 

required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in 

performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 

2.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 


A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having 

jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the 

completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 

2. Notifying Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during 

performance of its services. 

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to 

Architectwith copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of 

unresolved deficiencies. 

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with 

or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 



4.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG 

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection 

log for Architect'sreference during normal working hours. 

4.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and 

restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. 

Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible 

as possible. 

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control 

services. 



SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES 






A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, 

"approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. 

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," 

"approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, 

and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the 

same meaning as "indicated." 

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, 

conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. 

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar 

operations. 

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, 

placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on 

Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable 

construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract 

Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards 

applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in 

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to 

be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 

Available from Access Board 

www.access-board.gov 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 

www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr 

CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355 

Available from Army Corps of Engineers 

Waterways Experiment Station 

www.wes.army.mil 

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

www.dodssp.daps.mil 

DSCC 

FED-STD 

Defense Supply Center Columbus 

(See FS) 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 



Available from General Services Administration (202) 501-1021 

www.fss.gsa.gov 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 

www.nibs.org 

FTMS 

MIL 

MS MIL 

Federal Test Method Standard 

(See FS) 

See MILSPEC 

See MILSPEC 

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257 



UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 

www.access-board.gov 

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, 

they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site 


addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract 

Documents. 

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 

www.aluminum.org 

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 

www.aaadm.com 

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 

www.aabchq.com 

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 

www.aamanet.org 

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 

Transportation Officials 

www.transportation.org 

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 

www.aatcc.org 

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 

www.abma-dc.org 

ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 

(American Concrete Institute) 

www.aci-int.org 

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 

www.concrete-pipe.org 

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 

www.aeic.org 

AFPA 

American Forest & Paper Association 

(See AF&PA) 

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 

AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 

www.aga.org 

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

AHA 

American Hardboard Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 

www.aham.org 

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 

www.asphaltinstitute.org 

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 


www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 

www.steel.org 

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 

www.aitc-glulam.org 

ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 

www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 

www.alsc.org 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 

www.amca.org 

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437 

www.aosaseed.com 

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 

www.apawood.org 

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 

www.archprecast.org 

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 

www.api.org 

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 

www.ari.org 

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 

www.asphaltroofing.org 

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 

Air-Conditioning Engineers 

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 

www.asme.org 

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 

www.asse-plumbing.org 

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 


(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

www.astm.org 

AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) 

www.awci.org 

AWCMA 

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(See WCSC) 

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 

www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 

www.awpa.com 

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

www.buildershardware.com 

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 

www.bia.org 

BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991 

www.bicsi.org 

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's 

Association International) 

www.bifma.com 

CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 

www.carpetcushion.org 

CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 

www.umr.edu/~ccfss 

CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 

www.canelect.ca 

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com 

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 

www.cganet.com 

CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472 

www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956-0425 


CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 

www.cisca.org 

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 

www.cispi.org 

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 

www.chainlinkinfo.org 

CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 

www.pbmdf.com 

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 

CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 

www.crsi.org 

CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 

www.csa-international.org 

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 

www.cedarbureau.org 

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) 

www.cti.org 

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 

www.dhi.org 

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 

www.eia.org 

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 

www.ejma.org 

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 


FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org 

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00 

(The International Basketball Federation) 

www.fiba.com 

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 

(The International Volleyball Federation) 

www.fivb.ch 

FM 

Factory Mutual System 

(See FMG) 

FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 

(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) 

www.fmglobal.com 

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 

www.floridaroof.com 

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 

www.fluidsealing.com 

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 

www.fscoax.org 

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 

www.gypsum.org 

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 

www.glasswebsite.com 

GRI 

Geosynthetic Research Institute 

(See GSI) 

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 

www.greenseal.org 

GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 

www.geosynthetic-institute.org 

HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 

www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 

www.gamanet.org 

HMMA 

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 

(See NAAMM) 

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 

www.hpva.org 

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 

www.hpwhite.com 


IAS 

International Approval Services 

(See CSA) 

IBF International Badminton Federation (441-24) 223-4904 

www.intbadfed.org 

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 

www.icea.net 

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 

www.icri.org 

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 

www.iec.ch 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 

www.ieee.org 

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 

www.iesna.org 

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.igcc.org 

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510 

www.igmaonline.org 

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 

www.iliai.com 

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 

www.iso.ch 

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150 

www.issfa.net 

ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 

www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711 

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 

www.itu.int/home 

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 

www.kcma.org 

LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 

www.lma.org 

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 

www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 

www.mbma.com 

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 


www.maplefloor.org 

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 

www.metalframingmfg.org 

MH 

Material Handling Industry of America 

(See MHIA) 

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 

www.marble-institute.com 

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 

www.paintinfo.com 

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 

Fittings Industry Inc. 

www.mss-hq.com 

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 

www.naamm.org 

NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) 

www.nace.org 

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 

www.nadca.com 

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext. 

453 

www.aahperd.org/nagws/ 

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 

www.naima.org 

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 

www.nbgqa.com 

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 

www.ncaa.org 

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 

www.ncma.org 

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 

www.ncpi.org 

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 

www.ncta.com 

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 

www.nebb.org 


NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 

www.necanet.org 

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 

www.nelma.org 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 

www.nema.org 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 

www.netaworld.org 

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 

www.nfhs.org 

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 

www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 

www.nfrc.org 

NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 

www.glass.org 

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 

www.nlga.org 

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 

www.nofma.org 

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 

www.nsf.org 

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 

NTRMA 

NWWDA 

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(See RTI) 

National Wood Window and Door Association 

(See WDMA) 

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 


www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 

www.pci.org 

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 

www.pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu 

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 

www.post-tensioning.org 

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 

www.rfci.com 

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 

www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 

RTI Roof Tile Institute (312) 670-4177 

(Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) 

www.ntrma.org 

SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 

www.sae.org 

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 

www.sdi.org 

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 

www.steeldoor.org 

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 

www.sefalabs.com 

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.sgcc.org 

SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 

www.siaonline.org 

SIGMA 

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 

(See IGMA) 

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 

www.steeljoist.org 

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 

www.smacentral.org 


SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 

National Association 

www.smacna.org 

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 

www.smpte.org 

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics 

Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) 

www.sprayfoam.org 

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 

www.spib.org 

SPI/SPFD 

Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) 

Spray Polyurethane Foam Division 

(See SPFA) 

SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026 

(Single Ply Roofing Institute) 

www.spri.org 

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 

www.steeltank.com 

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.steelwindows.com 

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 

www.swrionline.org 

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 

www.tileusa.com 

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 

Industries Alliance 

www.tiaonline.org 

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 

www.masonrysociety.org 

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900 

www.tpinst.org 

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 


www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 

www.uni-bell.org 

USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 

www.usgbc.org 

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 

www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 

WCMA 

Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(See WCSC) 

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261 

Association) 

www.windowcoverings.org 

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 

Door Association) 

www.wdma.com 

WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 

www.wicnet.org 

WIC 

Woodwork Institute of California 

(See WI) 

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 

www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112 

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 

www.wwpa.org 

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they 

shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site 

addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract 

Documents. 

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. 

(See ICC) 

CABO 

Council of American Building Officials 


(See ICC) 

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 

www.iapmo.org 

ICBO 

ICBO ES 

International Conference of Building Officials 

(See ICC) 

ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. 

(See ICC-ES) 

ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 

(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) 

www.iccsafe.org 

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 

SBCCI 

Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 

(See ICC) 

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract 

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, 

and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the 


CE Army Corps of Engineers 

www.usace.army.mil 

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-6816 

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 

www.commerce.gov 

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 

www.eren.doe.gov 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 

www.epa.gov 

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 

www.faa.gov 

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 

www.fda.gov 

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 

www.gsa.gov (202) 501-1888 

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 

www.hud.gov 

LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (510) 486-4000 

www.lbl.gov 

NCHRP 

National Cooperative Highway Research Program 


(See TRB) 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 

www.nist.gov 

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 

PBS 

Public Building Service 

(See GSA) 

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 

//phs.os.dhhs.gov 

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 

(See USDA) 

SD State Department (202) 647-4000 

www.state.gov 

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 

www.nas.edu/trb 

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 

www.usda.gov 

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 

www.usps.com 





SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 


A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and 

weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction 

or substantial temporary closures. 

1.4 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to 

use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, 

Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before 

use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 


A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for 

operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before 

Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. 


2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean 

and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 

2. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 

22 deg C) unless temporary use of the building systems is arranged with owners representative. 

3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

1. Heating Equipment: Coordinate with Owner for use of permanent heating system. 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the 

Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed 

or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if 

necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 

B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and 

maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition 

existing before initial use. 

1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable 

size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. 

C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying 

of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high 

humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying 

of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select 

equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate 

ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 

E. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is 

maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. 

F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction 

operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating 

entire system. 

G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction 

personnel. Install minimum of one telephone line(s) for each field office. 

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: 

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 


2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 

a. Police and fire departments. 

b. Ambulance service. 

c. Contractor's home office. 

d. Architect's office. 

e. Owner's office. 

f. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of 

construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of 

security. 

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting 

structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 

C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, 

from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight 

enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary 

enclosures. 

D. Dustproof Temporary Partitions as applicable: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt 

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and/or tenants from fumes and noise. 

1. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor 

with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. 

Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood. 

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 

inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule. 

2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 

3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 

4. Protect air-handling equipment. 

5. Weather strip openings. 

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 

3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of 

temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar 

facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 


C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to 

permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been 

replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if 

necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary 

facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily 

repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to 

take possession of Project identification signs. 

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply 

with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 



SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product 

delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product 

substitutions; and comparable products. 


A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously 

purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar 

intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or 

other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of 

the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that 

products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products 

salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the 

Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 


A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. 

Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: 

a. Specification Section number and title. 

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. 

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. 

d. Manufacturer's name and address. 

e. Supplier's name and address. 

f. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 5 copies of initial product 

list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that 

must be established early in Contract period. 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 5 copies of completed 

product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract 

requirements. 

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed 

product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation 

of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of 

requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. 

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or 

installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the 

Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to 

accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. 

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, 

and specific features and requirements indicated. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation 

procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for 

compliance with requirements indicated. 

g. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a 

model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

h. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with 

products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or 

method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from 

manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 

i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract 

Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary 

because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation 

within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection 

of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within 

time allocated. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, 

product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were 

also options. 

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 


A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, 

including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, 

hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 

2. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or 

other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, 

and installing. 

3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products 

are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

2. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 

3. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weatherprotection 

requirements for storage. 

4. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by 

the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor 

of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular 

product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to 

extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for 

execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 

2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for 

submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 

1.8 LABELS: 

A. Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface. Where needed for observation after installation, 

locate on an accessible surface that, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous. 

B. Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint 

manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to 

view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of Work. 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 


A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged 

and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete 

installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide 

standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other 

projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the 


4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient 

characteristics" of products. 

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved 

equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for 

use of an unnamed product. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of 

the products listed that complies with requirements. 

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. 

Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If 

the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record 

noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other 

considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional 

responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost 

of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 




SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, 

the following: 

1. Field engineering and surveying. 

2. General installation of products. 

3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 

4. Progress cleaning. 

5. Starting and adjusting. 

6. Protection of installed construction. 

7. Correction of the Work. 




A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as 

existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical 

and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing 

are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities 

and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm 

sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. 

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where 

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

Record observations. 

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required 

by other Sections, include the following: 

a. Description of the Work. 

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 

d. Recommended corrections. 

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before 

equipment and fixture installation. 

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work 

indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility 

structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. 

Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before 

installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of 

other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction 

progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the 

Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem 

encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 

3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before 

beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. 

Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate 

permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the 

original survey control points. 

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data 

established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points 

sufficient to locate the Work. 

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original 

condition. 

3.4 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 


2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of 

removal for replacement. 

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling, unless noted 

otherwise. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications 

indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions 

required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of 

that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field 

installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and 

installing products to comply with indicated requirements. 

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, 

accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by 

Architect. 

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing 

anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be 

embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the 

best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS 

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction 

forces. 

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of 

the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes 

to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering 

portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by 

Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING 


A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for jointuse 

areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to 

rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers 

appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the 

Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as 

appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer 

or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning 

materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not 

damage exposed surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from 

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down 

sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. 

Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial 

Completion. 

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the 

construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in 

progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction 

period. 

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with 

new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged 

and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 


D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled 

components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality 


3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time 

of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with 

requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching 

materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible 

evidence of repair. 

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be 

repaired. 

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 



SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 

PART 1 GENERAL 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 

2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 

3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, 

remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. 

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in 

landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 

D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. 

E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Project goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste 

as possible including the following materials: 

1. Construction Waste: 

a. Metals. 

b. Insulation. 

c. Carpet and pad. 

d. Gypsum board. 

e. Piping. 

f. Electrical conduit. 

g. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of 

the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 

1) Paper. 

2) Cardboard. 

3) Boxes. 

4) Plastic sheet and film. 

5) Polystyrene packaging. 

6) Wood crates. 

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 1

7) Plastic pails. 

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. 

Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. 

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by 

the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. 

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in 

landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each 

means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe 

methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of 

their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include 

list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will 

accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and 

telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste 

including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials 

separation will be located. 



3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 

A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner or Architect. Provide handling, containers, 

storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire 

duration of the Contract. 

1. Comply with Section 01500 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and 

removal requirements. 

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, 

monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. 

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for 

the Work occurring at Project site. 

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures 

and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. 


D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with 

roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, 

recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 

2. Comply with Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental 

protection, and noise control. 

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL 

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. 

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste 

materials shall be solely to Contractor. 

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by 

type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from 

Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. 

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape 

stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 

5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE 

A. Packaging: 

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets 

that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for 

recycling wood. 

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 

B. Wood Materials: 

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. 

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. 

Screen out paper after grinding. 

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE 


A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from 

Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 



SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, 

the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Warranties. 

3. Final cleaning. 

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the 

following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons 

why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and 

similar documents. 

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and 

utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement 

surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with 

manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of 

changeover in security provisions. 

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and 

similar elements. 

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will 

either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of 

Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items 

identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is 

completed or corrected. 

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the 

following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or 

corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each 

item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and 

systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either 

proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for 

Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before 

certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is 

completed or corrected. 

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by 

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by 

Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, 

floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name of Architect. 

d. Name of Contractor. 

e. Page number. 

1.6 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where 

commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. 

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the 

Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with 

Contractor. 

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 


1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to 

accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the 

product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the 

product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and 

name of Contractor. 

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to 

be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage 

finished surfaces. 


3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and 

ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to 

condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial 

Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, 

films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. 

Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. 

b. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, 

trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

c. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

d. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or 

stains remain. 

e. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing 

compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and 

other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

f. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

g. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes 

and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair 

or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 

h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. 

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 


i. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 

j. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water 

exposure. 

k. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, 

registers, and grills. 

l. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 

m. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out 

bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent 

and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 

n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on 

Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste 

materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. 



SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, 

including the following: 

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 

2. Emergency manuals. 

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and 

equipment. 


A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. 

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 


A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial 

Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and 

mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. 

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will 

return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected 

manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 


A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factoryauthorized 

service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare 

manuals. 


2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 

1. List of documents. 

2. List of systems. 

3. List of equipment. 

4. Table of contents. 

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance 

manuals that contain information about each system. 

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not 

part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. 

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, 

subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, 

assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation 

for Building Systems." 

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL 

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and 

subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the 

following materials, in the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 

6. Name and address of Architect. 

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the 

volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include 

comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. 

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, 

and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a 

single binder. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate 

contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold 

label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 


a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder 

into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to 

provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. 

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 

MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for 

multiple-volume sets. Indicate Specification Section number. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate 

contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each 

divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for 

computerized electronic equipment. 

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and 

bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages 

indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 

6. Photographs: Use of Photographs to show unusual conditions is acceptable. Attach reinforced, punched 

binder tabs on photographs and bind with text. 

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 

1. Type of emergency. 

2. Emergency instructions. 

3. Emergency procedures. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and 

procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 

1. Fire. 

2. Gas leak. 

3. Water leak. 

4. Power failure. 

5. Water outage. 

6. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and 

signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and 

manufacturer to maintain warranties. 

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Instructions on stopping. 

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 


2.4 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification 

Sections and Include the following, as applicable: 

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

3. Operating standards. 

4. Operating procedures. 

5. Operating logs. 

6. Wiring diagrams. 

7. Control diagrams. 

8. Piped system diagrams. 

9. Precautions against improper use. 

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Startup procedures. 

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

4. Regulation and control procedures. 

5. Instructions on stopping. 

6. Normal shutdown instructions. 

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, 

product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described 

below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match 

manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and 

maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 


C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 

1. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

2. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

3. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

4. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would 

affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, 

manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare 

parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described 

below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product 

name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone 

number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number 

and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following 

information for each component part or piece of equipment: 

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component 

removal, replacement, and assembly. 

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 

1. Test and inspection instructions. 

2. Troubleshooting guide. 

3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. 


E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for 

equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time 

allotment. 

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and 

annual frequencies. 

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and 

cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and 

related services. 

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would 

affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized 

reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. This requirement may be deleted on less complex 

projects. 

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by 

emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. 

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of 

each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating 

operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, 

subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by 

Owner's operating personnel. 

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to 

product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. 

If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the 

Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the 

information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component 

parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings 

with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 


2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record 

Documents." 

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance 

documentation. 



SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be 

removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where 

indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to 

be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, 

commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be 

encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object 

in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 

1. Coordinate with Owner and Architect, who will establish special procedures for removal and salvage. 


A. If requested by the Owner or Building Manager provide a Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the 

following: 

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 

Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 

4. Use of elevator and stairs. 

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other 

tenants affected by selective demolition operations. 

6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial 

occupancy of completed Work. 

7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. 

B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and 

extent to that indicated for this Project. 

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective 

demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 

E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective 

demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 

a. Systems Furniture 

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective 

demolition. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify 

Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. 

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during 

selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 





A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition 

required. 

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are 

encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction 

photographs, preconstruction videotapes and/or templates. 

1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in 

final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make 

exact reproduction. 

F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during 


1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section 

"Summary." 

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and 

mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective 

demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain 

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of 

pipe or conduit after bypassing. 

a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the 

wall. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure 

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and 

Controls." 


B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and 

damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from 

occupied portions of building. 

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction 

on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior 

areas. 

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during 


4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 

Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability 

and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or 

uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as 

indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition 

operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least 

likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools 

designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 

Temporarily cover openings to remain. 

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished 

surfaces. 

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as 

duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting 

operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of 

off-site. 

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent 

ground impact or dust generation. 

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads 

on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Construction Waste Management." 

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 

1. Clean salvaged items. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner and/or as indicated on Drawings. 

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 


1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new 

equipment. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and 

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional 

for use indicated. 

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective 

demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during 

selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are 

complete. 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS 

A. Adhesively Applied Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the 

manufacturers of the above products. 

1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by methods recommended by 

manufacturers. 

B. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain 

Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved 

landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to 

grade level in a controlled descent. 

4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. 

Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 



SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Work Included: Rough carpentry as shown on the drawings. 


A. Grade Marks: 

1. Lumber grade mark stamps shall contain following: 

a. Symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review of American Lumber Standards 

Committee 

b. Mill number or name 

c. Grade of lumber 

d. Species or species grouping or combination designation 

e. Rules under which graded were applicable 

f. Condition of seasoning at time of manufacture 

i) S-GRN: Unseasoned 

ii) S-DRY: Maximum Moisture Content 19% 

iii) MC-15 or KD: Maximum Moisture Content 15% 



A. Lumber: PS-20; graded in accordance with established Grading Rules. 

1. Maximum Moisture Content: 19% 

2. Lumber shall be S4S dressed, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Plywood: PS 1; bearing grade trademark of American Plywood Association. 

C. Treated Wood: 

1. Fire Retardant Treatment: 

a. Provide materials which comply with UL surface burning characteristics, Type A in 

accordance with requirements of AWPA Standards C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood 

and kiln dried after treatment KDAT as a minimum. 

b. Fire retardant chemical shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate, and 

formaldehyde and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency. 

c. Flame spread rating shall be not more than 25, when tested by ASTM E84 with no 

increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon continuation of 

test for an additional 20 minutes. 

d. Fire retardant lumber and plywood shall have an Underwriter's Laboratory stamp FR-S. 

e. Lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment, and 

plywood redried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment. 

f. Fire retardant treated wood shall have an equilibrium moisture content of not more than 

25% when tested in accordance with ASTM D3201 at 95% relative humidity. 

2. Preservative Treatment: 

a. Provide materials which comply with requirements of AWPA LP-2 as a minimum. 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1

D. Fasteners: 

1. Fasteners shall be sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity 

locations, and with treated wood. Plain finish shall be provided for other interior locations. 

2. Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. 

3. Expansion shield and lag bolt type shall be used for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. 

4. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 




1. Provide wood blocking for anchorage of other materials. Form to shapes and sizes as indicated or 

as may be required to accomplish a particular installation. Form blocking of minimum 2" nominal 

thickness material. 

2. Coordinate location of blocking for all surface mounted items such as equipment (TVs), wall 

cabinets, shelving, door stops, handrail brackets, coat hooks, wall bumpers,etc.. 

3. On members that are to receive an applied finish surface, align subsurface to vary not more than 

1/8" from plane of adjacent members. 

4. Fasten parts of rough carpentry work securely in their proper place. Frame openings and provide 

blocking for work of other trades. 

5. Size wood before treatment to minimize cutting after treatment. 

B. Treated Wood: 

1. Fire retardant treated wood is required where used as blocking in fire rated partitions, or when part 

of other fire rated assemblies. 

2. Provide preservative treated permanent wood grounds and temporary wood grounds for proper 

execution of work of all trades. Remove temporary grounds when they are no longer required. 

3. Wood used in following areas shall be preservative treated: 

a. Wood in contact with earth, concrete, plaster, masonry, or steel. 

b. Wood used for sills, screeds, cant strips, plates, blocking, gravel stops, nailers, and 

bucks. 

4. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber unless specifically allowed by manufacturer. Only 

end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts shall be permitted. 

C. Fasteners: 

1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by 

recognized standards. Countersink bolt heads. 

2. Select fasteners of a size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to 

view in finished Work, or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. 

Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2

SECTION 06 40 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following; all of which may not be indicated or required in the Contract Documents. 

1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 

3. Solid Surfacing countertops 

4. Closet and utility shelving. 


A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork 

items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing 

materials and processes. Submit literature for specialty items not manufactured by architectural woodworker 

including, but not limited to, stand offs, reveals, metal inserts, spacers,etc. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Shop drawings of woodwork items shall include AWI quality grade construction, key plan showing location of 

items, dimensioned plans, elevations, vertical sections, plan sections, profiles of trim and moldings, and 

details. 

2. Show reveals, joinery, anchoring to adjacent construction, shapes, thickness, wood species, cut, veneer 

matching, grain direction, and other similar detailed information to fully describe fabrication, finishing, and 

installation. 

3. Shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail and scale to determine compliance with intent of quality grades 

specified. 

4. Casework shop drawings shall indicate: 

a. Construction, cabinet style 

b. Tops, edges, and splashes 

c. Scribing and fillers 

d. Finish for each area 

e. Decorative laminate selection 

f. Hardware 

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-1

C. Samples for Verification: 

1. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include 

at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 

2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for 

panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished. 

3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to 

core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. 

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior 

architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers. 

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for 

grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that woodwork complies with requirements 

of grades specified. 

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and 

products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method 

indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify 

with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where 

required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after 

installation. 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in 

installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where 

environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and 

HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the 

remainder of the construction period. 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and 

HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 

and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 

C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other 

construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate 

fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements 

before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 



A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified 

in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section “Door 

Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products) " to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings 

and fabrication with hardware requirements. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and 

quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: See Appendix A. 

C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Close Grained Hardwood. 

D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, 

3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except 

for density. 

4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 

E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamineimpregnated 

decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 

1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semi 

exposed edges. 

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork 

quality standard. 

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this 

Article, which are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 

1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or 

that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do 

not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber 

Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and 

fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and 

smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 


1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum 

properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screwholding 

capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items 

specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening. 

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. 

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; 

full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. 

4. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide. 

F. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching 

plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 

G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA 

finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 

H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in 

BHMA A156.9. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent 

moisture content. 

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide 

nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as 

required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in 

relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. 

B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. 

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. 


D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before 

shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where 

necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, 

and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately 

sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS 

A. Grade: Custom. 

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces including edges: High-pressure decorative laminate – see Appendix A 

D. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces: 

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels 

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, 

Grade BKL. 

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate 

surfaces complying with the following requirements: 

1. See Appendix A 

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS / SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 


B. See Appendix A 

2.8 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING 


B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel with solid-lumber edge. 

C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber. 

D. Wood Species: Match species indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in 

same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 




A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as 

required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 


A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of 

woodwork involved. 

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to 

extent that it was not completed in the shop. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb 

(including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical 

treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. 

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, 

concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing 

screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent 

finish is indicated. 

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust 

hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of 

hardware and accessory items as indicated. 

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with 

No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside 

of countertop. 

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 

3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler 

where exposed. 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not 

possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 


C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or 

soiled areas. 



SECTION 07841 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated 

constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings 

containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist 

spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original 

fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 

or UL 1479: 

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than 

that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings 

indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with 

adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide 

through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient 

temperatures and 400 deg F. 

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products 

that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant throughpenetration 

firestop systems. 

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and 

traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or 

by other means. 

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring 

removal of insulation. 

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-1


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Submit schedule with each through-penetration firestop system, 

along with the following information: 

1. Types of penetrating items. 

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of 

construction penetrated. 

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by UL-classified system. Refer to alphaalpha-numeric 

designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. 

C. Qualification Data: For installer 

D. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer. 

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with 

requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop 

Contractors." 

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project to a single qualified 

installer. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction 

condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. 

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following 

requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and 

inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop 

systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 

Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and 

inspecting agency. 

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to throughpenetration 

firestop system designations listed by the following: 

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages 

with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, 


shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing 

time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. 

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to 

moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates 

are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this 

is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are 

installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration 

firestop systems. 

C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other 

construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 


2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the 

substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under 

conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based 

on testing and field experience. 

B. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D: 

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L 

C. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill 

materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by 

through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for 

firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill 

materials in liquid state. 


c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 

2.2 FILL MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through- 

Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this 

Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," 

or "cavity" materials. 

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of 

an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve 

for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. 

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. 

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized 

to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to 

galvanized steel sheet. 

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or 

silicone compounds. 

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. 

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight 

aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. 

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of 

mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. 

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to 

produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag 

formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless 

indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal 

surfaces. 

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 

2.3 MIXING 


A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system 

manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing 

equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to 

produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening 

configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply 

with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could 

interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing 

optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning 

operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer 

using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow 

spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining 

surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or 

damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove 

tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and 

with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and 

applications indicated. 

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during 

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire 

ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other 

accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. 

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 


1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required 

to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces 

that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

3.4 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems in concealed locations with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach 

labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be 

visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal 

labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces 

on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal 

is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management 

of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with 

requirements. 

B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are 

issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that 

are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in 

which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration 

firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, 

damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems 

immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 



SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes; all of which may not be indicated or required for the Contract Documents. 

1. Joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 

2. Joint-sealant backing. 

3. Miscellaneous material. 

B. Definitions: 

1. M: Masonry 

2. G: Glass 

3. A: Aluminum 

4. O: Other 

5. T: Traffic 

6. NT: Nontrafffic 

7. M: Multicomponent 

8. P: Pourable 


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without 

staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint 

seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare a sealant schedule describing type, brand, color and location of each sealant to be applied. 

Submit 3 copies of sealant schedule prior to application. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 

1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the 

appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric 

sealants required for this Project. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 

C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals 

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint 

sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. 


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant 

manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 

2. When joint substrates are wet. 

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 

4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint 

sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to 

furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other 

requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the 

following: 

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written 

specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to 

design or construction. 

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. 



2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and 

with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on 

testing and field experience. 

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system 

that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: 

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L 

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically 

curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses 

related to exposure and joint substrates. 

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous 

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous 

joint substrates indicated for Project. 

C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated 

contact with food provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 

D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 

1. Available Products: 

a. Pecora Corporation; 898. 

b. Tremco; Tremsil 200. 

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 

3. Class: 25. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 

a. Use O Joint Substrates: granite, marble, ceramic tile, solid surface materials and plastic laminate. 

E. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 


a. Tremco; Dymeric 511. 

b. Tremco; THC-900/901. 

c. Tremco; Vulkem 227. 

d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. 


2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 

3. Class: 50 or less. 

4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic). 


a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, 

granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood 

F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 


a. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 


3. Class: 25. 

4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 



granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood. 

G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 


a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900. 

b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. 

c. Tremco; Vulkem 921. 


3. Class: 50. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 



granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood. 

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 

B. Available Products: 

1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 

2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

3. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 


A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, 

sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based 

on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), B (bicellular material 

with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint 

application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum 

sealant performance: 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing 

sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion 

would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint 

substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing 

materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent 

nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint 

configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant 

manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including 

dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and 

compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, 

surface dirt, and frost. 

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a 

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with 

joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing 

out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Concrete. 

b. Masonry. 

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic and/or quarry tile. 

d. Dimensional stone 


e. Wood 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave 

residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the 

following: 

a. Metal. 

b. Glass. 

c. Porcelain enamel. 

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on 

preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant 

manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration 

onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that 

otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove 

sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications 

indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable 

to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce 

cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement 

capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with 

dry materials. 

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of 

joints. 

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant 

movement capability. 

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool 

sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to 

eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 


2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or 

adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, as noted. 

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in 

ASTM C 1193, as noted. 

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning 

materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 

3.5 PROTECTION 

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage 

resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of 

Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or 

deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior ceramic and dimension stone tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation 

joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 

1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component nonsag urethane sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant. 


C. Joint-Sealant Application JS: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows 

and elevator entrances. 

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 


END OF SECTION 0 7 92 00 


SECTION 08 12 16 - ALUMINUM FRAMES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior aluminum frames for doors. 

2. Interior aluminum frames for sidelights and fixed glass panels. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, 

and finishes for each type of interior aluminum frame indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 

D. Maintenance Data: For interior aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of interior aluminum frames and are 

based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." 

B. Fire-Rated Door-Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing 

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 

1. As scheduled on Drawings. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for interior aluminum frames is based on the following: 

1. Frameworks; Series 2, 1 1/2" Flush Trim in clear anodized finish. 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Frameworks Manufacturing, Inc. contact: Scott Rutledge 410-263-1500 

2. Custom Components Inc. contact: Jim Blair 800-516-9474 

3. Avanti Systems USA. contact: 877.282.6843 

ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16-1

2.2 COMPONENTS 

A. Aluminum Framing, General: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit 

structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 

B. Door Frames: Reinforced for hinges and strikes. 

C. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-in casing trim without 

exposed fasteners. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, 

stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. 

B. Sound Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals. 

C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets. 

D. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 08 door hardware Sections. 

2.4 FABRICATION 

A. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and 

fastened within frame with concealed screws. 

B. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered 

connections. 

C. Fabricate frames for glazing with recess and gaskets to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 

D. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations 

for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating 

aluminum finishes. 

C. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: 

etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color 

coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 

1. Color: Clear Anodized unless otherwise specified in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials 




A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. 



A. Comply with frame manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

B. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates. 

C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96” long must be 1 piece. 

1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 24” centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners 

approved by frame manufacturer. 

2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 

3. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trim members. 

4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame 

manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. 

B. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm). Remove and 

replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 



SECTION 08 14 00 - WOOD DOORS 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Solid core wood doors 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced. 

B. American National Standards Institute: 

1. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 

2. ANSI A151 Series 

3. ANSI A208.1 Particleboard 

C. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM D523 Standard Test for Specular Gloss 

2. ASTM D1037 Test Methods for Evaluating the Properties of Wood Base Fiber and Particle Panel 

Materials 

3. ASTM E152 Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

D. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 

1. AWI Quality Standards, Guide Specifications 

E. Door and Hardware Institute: 

1. DHI Publication - WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors 

F. National Fire Protection Association: 

1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows 

2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 

3. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies 

4. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

G. Window and Door Manufacturers Association: 

1. WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors 

H. Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.: 

1. UL Standard 10C Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

2. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 

3. UL Building Materials Directory 


A. Trade Terms used in this Specification: 

1. ADHESIVE – A substance capable of bonding materials together by surface attachment. 

a. TYPE I ADHESIVE – Fully waterproof; forms a bond that will retain practically all its 

strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying. Bond shall be of 

such quality that specimens will withstand shear and two cycle boil test. 

b. Type II Adhesive – Water-resistant; forms a bond that will retain practically all its strength 

when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying. Bond shall be of such 

quality that specimens will withstand three cycle cold soak test. 

WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-1


2. BLENDING - Color change that is detectable at a distance of 6’ to 8’, but which does not seriously 

detract from overall appearance of panel. 

3. CORE - Innermost layer in veneered construction, normally consisting of several individual wood 

pieces edge-glued and end-glued together. 

4. CROSS-BANDING - A ply placed between core and face veneer in 5-ply construction. 

5. GRAIN - Arrangement of wood fibers and pores evident on cut and/or finished wood products. 

Direction, size, arrangement, and appearance of fibers in wood or veneer. Appearance of grain 

varies with both species and cut. 

6. FACE VENEER - Outermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door. 

7. FIGURE - Pattern produced, usually across grain, by natural deviations from normal grain. 

8. LOCK BLOCK - A concealed block, same thickness as door stile or core, which is adjacent to stile at 

a location corresponding to lock location and into which a lock is fitted. 

9. MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD (MDF) - Generic name for a panel manufactured from 

lignocellulosic fibers combined with a synthetic resin or other suitable binder and bonded together 

under heat and pressure in a hot press by a process in which entire bond is created by added 

binder. 

10. MEDIUM DENSITY OVERLAY (MDO) - A thermosetting resin impregnated paper applied to a door 

face to provide optimum surface for a paint finish. 

11. OPAQUE FINISH – A paint or pigmented stain finish that hides natural characteristics and color of 

grain of wood surface and is not transparent. 

12. ORANGE PEEL - In finishing, slight depressions in surface, similar to skin of an orange. 

13. PANEL - FLAT - A single or multi-layered (laminated) panel. 

14. PANEL - RAISED - A door panel whose faces are raised above edges that are shaped to fit into 

grooves in stiles and rails. 

15. RAIL - A horizontal structural member of a door. 

16. STICKLING - A profile machined in to edges of stiles, rails, mullions, muntins, or bars, adjacent to 

panels, glazing materials, or louvers. 

17. STILE - A vertical member of a door. 

18. TRANSPARENT FINISH – A stain or clear finish that allows natural characteristics and color of grain 

of wood surface to show through finish. 

A. Product Data: 

1. Submit manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and installation requirements for each type of 

wood door to be provided for use on this Project. 


1. Submit shop drawings and schedules indicating location and size of each door. 

2. Indicate construction details, fire-ratings, elevations, materials, thickness, door swing, stile and rail 

dimensions, veneers, undercuts, locations of finish hardware by dimension and locations/details of 

openings and louvers and other pertinent data. 

3. Shop drawings submittal shall be coordinated with shop drawings submission of related portions of 

Work, such as: 

a. Hollow metal doors and frames 

b. Hardware 

C. Samples: 

1. Submit samples for review of color, texture, grain, and finish only. Provide samples in sufficient 

number to demonstrate full range of grain, color, texture, and finish expected in final work. 

2. Allow for 5 separate submissions of each wood finish for matching control sample provided by 

Architect. 

3. Fabricate samples using selected flitch. 

4. Solid stock samples shall be profiles and types of woods scheduled. 


5. Samples shall represent, in all respects, minimum quality to be furnished by manufacturer. No 

work represented by samples shall be fabricated until samples are accepted. Downgrading of 

quality demonstrated by samples may be cause for rejection. 

6. Submit 2 samples for each wood finish; minimum. 

7. Sample Size: 

a. Wood Veneer Finishes: 

1) Transparent Finish: 18” min. width x 30” min. length 

2) Opaque Finish: 12” x 12” 

b. Solid Stock Trim: 12” lengths 

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: 

1. Test Reports: 

a. Submit test reports prepared by an independent testing laboratory indicating full 

compliance with specified requirements for screw withdrawal, split resistance, and hinge 

loading. 

2. Certificates: 

a. Door manufacturer shall provide a letter, signed by an authorized company 

representative, to Architect stating that doors have been manufactured in compliance 

with this specification. 

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: 

a. Submit manufacturer’s installation procedures which shall be basis for accepting or 

rejecting actual installation procedures. 



1. Door manufacturer shall be a company with a minimum of 5 years of verifiable experience 

manufacturing wood doors. 

2. Wood doors shall be five-ply construction, seven-ply construction does not satisfy this specification 

and shall not be acceptable. 

3. Single Source Responsibility: 

a. To greatest extent possible, wood doors shall be products of a single manufacturer. 

b. Veneers for transparent finishes shall be supplied from a single source. 

c. Provide secondary materials that are produced or are specifically recommended by 

manufacturer of wood doors to ensure uniformity of quality and appearance throughout 

Project. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI for materials, fabrication and 

machining of wood doors. 

2. Fabrication and installation of fire rated wood doors shall comply with ASTM E152 and National 

Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Door and Hardware 

Institute (DHI) provisions or standards listed below. 

3. National Fire Protection Association: 

a. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 

b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 

c. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door 

Assemblies 

d. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 

a. UL Standard 10C Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

b. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 

5. Door and Hardware Institute: 

a. WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors 

6. Comply with applicable Federal Accessibility Regulations: 


a. Americans with Disabilities Act - ADA 

b. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards - UFAS 

c. ANSI A117.1 Standard for Accessible and Usable Building s and Facilities 

C. Certifications: 

1. Fire-rated doors and frames shall bear labels by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock Hersey 

International, or other nationally recognized organizations acceptable to authority having 

jurisdiction. Provide fire-rated doors with a label permanently attached to either hinge stile or to top 

rail, showing testing agency approval for classification scheduled. 

2. Door assemblies shall bear fire-rating labels indicating following: 

a. Hourly fire rating 

b. Temperature rise developed on unexposed surface after 30 minutes of exposure 

c. Letter “S” to designate smoke-resistance 

d. Name and address of listee 

e. Model number of type 

f. Symbol, serial or issue number of listing agency 

3. Tops of doors shall bear a label from manufacturer indicating door construction, face veneer 

species, cut, grade, and finishing information. 


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 

1. Doors shall be individually wrapped in poly bags. Break seals on-site to permit ventilation. 

2. Clearly label each door with opening number where door is scheduled for installation. Use 

removable, temporary labels or mark on door surface that will be concealed from view after 

installation. 

a. Coordinate door identification with shop drawing designations. 

3. Handle doors in a manner to prevent damage to exposed surfaces in compliance with WDMA I.S.1- 

A, Section G-20 Care and Installation at Job Site. 

4. Do not drag doors across one another. 

B. Storage and Protection: 

1. Store doors in a protected, dry area at least 6” (150 mm) off floor. 

2. Stack units so that water cannot accumulate on or within materials, using shims to provide 

drainage and air circulation. 

3. Protect doors from direct exposure to sunlight. 

4. Avoid subjecting doors to extreme heat, dryness, or moisture. 

5. Doors that have been scratched, or otherwise damaged shall be removed from Site. 


A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Spaces shall be ready to receive wood doors with temperature and humidity controlled to avoid 

damage by excessive changes in atmospheric conditions. Temperature and humidity shall be 

stabilized in installation areas at approximate level that will prevail in building when occupied. 

Relative humidity shall be not less than 30% or more than 60%. 

1.08 SPECIAL WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering cost to repair or replacement of defective materials or 

workmanship for a periods as indicated below from Date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover 

defects that render doors unacceptable or unfit for ordinary, recommended use, including, but not limited to 

delaminating, warping, and core telegraphing through face. 

1. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Five years 

2. Solid Core Flush Slab Wood Doors: Life of Original Installation 


B. A representative of door manufacturer shall inspect installed doors and shall note on guarantee that no 

provisions of guarantee have been nullified in manufacture or installation. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Flush Slab Doors: 

1. Algoma Hardwoods 

2. Buell Door Co. 

3. Eggers Industries 

4. VT Industries 

5. Weyerhauser Co. 


A. Wood Veneer: 

1. Wood Species and Cut: Refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes 

2. Grade: Grade AA 

a. Veneer grades shall comply with face veneer characteristics established by Hardwood 

Plywood & Veneer Association (HPVA) and adapted by Architectural Woodwork Institute 

(AWI). 

4. Thickness: 1/40” minimum at time of cutting 

5. Amount of veneer needed shall be based on a ratio of 3 to 1 (raw face veneer to panel surface 

area). 

2.03 WOOD DOORS 

A. Solid Core Doors: Flush slab; AWI 1300 

1. Grade: Premium 

2. Core Materials: 

a. Non-Rated: PC-5; Particleboard; ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2 

b. Fire Rated: FD-5; Non-combustible mineral core or particle board per label requirements 

3. Face Materials: 

a. Transparent Finish Doors: Wood veneer 

b. Opaque Finish Doors: MDO or tempered hardboard 

4. Sizes: As indicated on drawings 

5. U.L. Label Rating: As indicated on Drawings 

B. Stile and Rail Doors: AWI 1400 

1. Grade: Premium 

2. Type: As indicated on Drawings 

3. Solid Stock: Grade II 

a. Wood Species: Refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes 

4. Sizes: As indicated on drawings 



1. Wood door manufacturer shall machine doors for cutouts, hinges, locks and hardware needing 

routing and mortising. Perform rabbeting as needed to properly hang doors prior to finishing. 


2. Doors may, at Contractor’s option, be completely pre-fitted for all hardware by door manufacturer. 

3. Locate items in compliance with Door and Hardware Institute publication WDHS.3 Recommended 

Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. Mounting heights shall be measured from finish floor, 

except top butt. 

a. Butts: 

1) Top: 9 5/8” center of butt to top of door 

2) Intermediate: Equal distance between top and bottom butts 

3) Bottom: 10 3/8” to center of butt 

b. Locksets and Latchsets: 40 5/16” to center of strike 

c. Deadlocks: 60” to center of strike 

d. Exit Devices: 40 5/16” to center of strike 

e. Push Plates: 45” to center 

f. Pull Bars (Grips): 42” to center 

4. Wood Veneer: Transparent finish 

a. Matching of Adjacent Pieces of Veneer: Book match 

b. Panel Face Assembly: Center-Balance match 

c. Doors in pairs and sets shall be sequence matched. 

5. Blocking: Provide either hardwood or structural composite lumber wood blocking in doors or as 

required to meet specified fire rating and as follows: 

a. Top Rail (No Closer): Minimum 1-1/8 inch. 

b. Top Rail (Closer): Minimum 5-inch remaining after installation. Verify with closer 

manufacturer. 

c. Bottom Rail: Minimum 1-1/8 inch after undercut. 

d. Bottom Rail: 5-inch bottom-rail in doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. 

e. Midrail: 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices at location of exit 

device. 

6. Stiles: Provide stiles consisting of two plys. 

a. The inner-ply shall be minimum 1-1/8 inches Structural Composite Lumber (SCL) or 

approved non-combustible material on 20 minute rated doors, On 45, 60, and 90 minute 

rated doors, the inner-ply shall be 1-inch of Structural Composite lumber or approved 

combustible material. 

b. The outer ply shall be of hardwood lumber the same species as the face veneer with. 

c. Veneer tape will not be permitted. 

B. Flush Slab Doors: 

1. Vertical and horizontal edges of solid and mineral core doors shall be bonded to core and then 

abrasively planed before veneering to ensure minimal telegraphing of core part through veneers. 

2. Hot press entire door construction under 85 psi to 125 psi at not less than 240°F to ensure even 

glue bonds at door edges and across face. 

3. Provide doors with 1 3/4” (35 mm) minimum thickness, 2-ply stile and rail edges outer ply of same 

wood species as face veneer; inner ply mill option. 

4. Glue lines between face and frame, and between plies of face shall be Type I rigid set adhesive. 

5. Non-rated doors shall meet performance criteria as follows: 

a. Split Resistance: 

1) Not less than 500 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test Method 

5. 

b. Direct Screw Withdrawal: ASTM D1037 

1) Not less than 1,000 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test 

Method 10. 

c. Hinge Loading: 

1) Not less than 1,380 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test 

Method 8. 

C. Labeled Flush Slab Doors: 45, 60, and 90 minute rated 


2.06 FINISHES 

1. Mineral core flush doors shall be securely bonded together utilizing Type I adhesive. Manufacture 

doors where temperature and humidity controls will insure a state of equilibrium between 

component parts at all times. 

2. Core density shall be 26 lbs. per cubic foot (nominal). 

3. Provide doors with 2-ply, laminated rail edges of salt free, flame resistant material. Outer ply shall 

be same wood species as face veneer; inner ply mill option. Securely glue rails to core. 

4. Stiles shall be bonded to core and be of salt free, flame resistant material. Stiles shall meet 

performance criteria as follows: 

a. Split Resistance: 

1) Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 900 load pounds when 

tested in compliance with Test Method to Determine Split Resistance of Hinge 

Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors. 

b. Direct Screw Withdrawal: ASTM D1037 

1) Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 650 load pounds when 

tested for direct screw withdrawal, using a No. 12 x 1 1/4” steel thread-to-head 

wood screw of cadmium plated or rust-resistant type 

c. Hinge Loading: 

1) Not less than 860 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test Method 

8. 

d. Cycle/Slam: ANSI A151.1, Section 2.5 

1) 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure 

5. Labeled doors shall be manufactured to sizes as needed to provide proper clearances without field 

trimming. This procedure shall be followed to assure full thickness of edge bands. 

6. Provide salt free non-combustible internal solid blocking for fire doors with mineral core. Arrange 

blocking in door so that surface mounted hardware such as, but not limited to, closers, exit device, 

etc. may be secured to door without a need for through bolts. A lock block, minimum size 5x12 

shall be supplied for bored and mortised locks. Provide top and bottom blocking for attachment of 

hardware; minimum size 5”. Provide lock blocks as needed for flushbolts at locations indicated on 

hardware templates. 

7. Provide metal edges only on pairs of fire doors with two surface mounted vertical rod exit devices. 

Other pairs will be furnished with metal edges and overlapping astragal. Metal edges and astragal 

shall be veneer wrapped with same specie as door face. 

8. Metal astragal for pairs of fire doors shall be formed, pre-machined and veneer wrapped with same 

specie as door face. 

9. At exit enclosures, provide doors listed for 450°F maximum temperature rise rating for 30 minutes 

of exposure. 

10. Fire endurance test shall have neutral pressure level established at

B. Shop Applied Finishes: Catalyzed polyurethane AWI 1500 

1. Quality Grade: Premium 

3. Transparent Finish: AWI System #TR-6 

a. Color: Stain to match control sample provided by Architect 

b. Sheen (60° gloss meter): Satin; 32° - 36° ASTM D523 

c. Effect: Partially filled pore 

d. An ultraviolet sun-screening agent shall be added to finish coat to inhibit discoloration 

and darkening of mahogany and cherry veneers. 

4. Opaque Finish: AWI System #OP-6 

a. Color: Match color selected by Architect; refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes 

b. Sheen (60° gloss meter): 60 Semi-gloss; 55° - 75° ASTM D523 

c. Effect: Partially filled pore 

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Fabrication Tolerances: 

1. Size: 

a. Thickness: ±1/16” 

b. Length: ±1/16” 

c. Standard Widths: ±1/16” 

d. Pre-fit Widths: ±1/32” 

2. Factory Hardware Preparation: Comply with tolerances indicated on hardware templates. 

3. Warp shall be measured as a distortion in door itself, and shall not refer to door in relation to frame 

or jamb in which it is hung. Warp shall not exceed 1/4” in plane of door itself. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Site Verification of Conditions 

1. Examine frames and other conditions under which installation of wood doors is to be performed. 

2. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper hanging of doors. 

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

4. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for 

satisfactory performance. 



1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frame in compliance with NFPA No. 80 and 101. 

a. Preparation of 20, 45, 60, and 90 minute doors shall be done under label service in 

compliance with manufacturer’s service procedure. This includes trimming for size, 

except a maximum of 3/4” off bottom of door. 

b. Preparation for locks, latches, hinges, closers, lights, louvers, astragal, and any 

fabrication shall be done under licensed label service. 

2. Hang doors to operate freely, but not loosely, and free from rattling when in latched position. Doors 

shall be free from hinge bound conditions, sticking or binding with hardware properly adjusted and 

in functioning order. 

3. Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance. Fit doors tightly against stops. Doors 

that are warped, twisted, or which are not in true plane shall be removed and replaced at no 

additional cost to Owner. 

4. Trim doors width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and 

machining. 


5. Trim door height by cutting equally from top and bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4”. Seal cut 

surfaces after field-cutting with oil base paint, lacquer, or varnish. 

6. Surface mounted hardware items on solid core doors shall be applied with sheet metal screws in 

pilot drilled holes. 

7. Provide threaded-to-head wood screws for fastening hardware on doors. 

8. Pilot holes shall be drilled for screws attaching hinges, lock hardware and other devices to wood 

doors. Pilot holes shall not exceed 90% of root diameter of screw. 

B. Hanging Tolerances: 

1. Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/4” maximum 

a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over 

an imaginary 36” x 84” surface area. 

2. Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/4” maximum 

a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an 

imaginary 36” x 84” surface area. 

3. Width Distortion (Cup): 1/4” maximum 

a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an 

imaginary 36” x 84” surface area. 

4. Doors shall not extend beyond 1/16” from face of jamb, or more than 1/8” behind jamb face. 

C. Clearances: Subject to ± 1/32” (0.8 mm) tolerance 

1. Head and Jambs: 1/8” (3 mm) 

2. Meeting Edges for pairs of doors: 1/8” (3 mm) 

3. Clearances at Bottom of Fire Doors: 

a. Where no threshold is used, allow not more than 3/4” (20 mm) above floor slab. 

b. Where a threshold is used, allow not more than 3/8” (10 mm) above threshold. 

c. Where floor finish material is used, allow not more than 1/2” (12 mm) above finish 

material. 

4. Undercut non-rated doors sufficiently to allow clearance above finish floors and where indicated on 

Drawings to allow for adequate air transfer. Provide doors with sufficient undercut to allow 

clearance above finish floors. 

a. Where scheduled floor finish material is less than 1/2” (12 mm) thick allow not more than 

5/8” (16 mm) above top of substrate to which it is applied. 

b. Where scheduled floor finish material is more than 1/2” (12 mm) thick allow not more 

than 1/4” (6 mm) above finish material. 

c. Allow not more than 1/4” (6 mm) above threshold. 

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Operational Test: 

1. After installation of fire doors is completed, operational tests shall be conducted on each door. 

2. Tests shall be adequate to determine that system has been installed and functions as intended. 


A. Adjust and check each door to ensure proper operating and function. 

B. Replace or re-hang doors that are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely. Replace doors that are 

warped, twisted, or which are not in true planes. 

C. Replace prefinished doors damaged during installation. 



SECTION 08 42 26 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Glass entrance doors 

2. Sidelights and transom panels 

3. Hardware 

4. Anchors, brackets, and attachments 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association: 

B. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 

1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 

C. American National Standards Institute: 

1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and 

Method of Test 

D. Glass Tempering Association: 

1. Specification for Fully-Tempered Glass 

2. Engineering Standards Manual 

E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers: 

1. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual 

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Design Requirements: 

1. Building Movement: 

a. System shall be designed to withstand building movements including thermal 

movements, loading deflections, shrinkage and similar movements. 

2. Doors: 

a. Doors shall be designed to withstand operating loads which result from a heavy traffic 

condition using selected hardware, without permanent measurable deflections. 

b. Limit elastic deflections to provide normal degree of rigidity required to avoid glass 

breakage and other objectionable results of excessive flexibility. 



1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided. 


1. Submit shop drawings for systems. Show anchorage, field connections, and glazing for component 

parts and prepare coordination details for entire system including framing and bracing to structure. 

2. Shop drawings shall show scale elevations and sections. Full size sections shall be shown only 

when needed for clarity. 

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-1

C. Samples: 

1. Samples submitted shall be of production type and shall represent minimum quality of work to be 

furnished by manufacturer. No work represented by samples shall be fabricated until samples are 

accepted. Downgrading of quality demonstrated by samples may be cause for rejection of work. 

2. Submit 2 samples of finished metal materials: 

a. Extrusions: 12" lengths 

b. Sheet or plate materials: 6" squares 

3. Submit 2 samples of glass; sample size shall be 12" x 12". 

D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 

1. Submit instructions to be followed in cleaning and maintaining components of system. 



1. When a product manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in 

manufacture with a minimum of 5 years experience. 

2. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of all-glass entrances 

and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer 

shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 


a. To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of one manufacturer or items 

standard with manufacturer of entrance system. 


A. Field Measurements: 

1. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements so work will be accurately 

designed, fabricated and fitted to structure. Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to 

establish and maintain field dimensions. 

2. Manufacturer shall be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and 

shall indicate, on shop drawings, required field measurements beyond his control. 

1.06 WARRANTY 

A. Provide a 1 year written guarantee signed by Contractor and installer agreeing to repair or replace defective 

materials or workmanship, including evidence of early deterioration, weathering or aging of work, failure of 

operating parts to properly function and other deterioration or failure of work to comply with performance or 

other requirements. 


2.01 SELECTIONS 

A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material selections. 


A. All-Glass Entrances: 

1. Blumcraft 

2. Bogardus Wilson Ltd. 

3. Brite Vue Glass Systems Inc. 

4. Falconer Glass Industries 


5. Pilkington 

6. Tempglass 

7. Virginia Glass Products Corp. 

8. W & W Glass Products 

B. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: 

1. Cadillac Rubber & Plastics 

2. Santoprene 

3. Morton Thiokol Inc. 

4. Rubber Trim Products 

5. Tremco Manufacturing Co. 

6. Pecora Corporation 

7. Williams Products Inc. 

C. Sealants: 

1. Bostik 

2. Dow-Corning 

3. GE Silicones 


5. PTI 

6. Rhône-Poulenc - Rhodorsil 


D. Fluoropolymer Coatings: 

1. Akzo 

2. Glidden Co. 

3. Morton International 

4. PPG Industries Inc. 

5. Valspar 


A. Glass: 

1. Classifications: Primary Flat Glass; ASTM C1036 

a. Clear Glass: Type 1, class 1, quality q 3 

b. Tinted Glass: Type 1, class 2, quality q 3 

B. Carbon Steel: 

1. Carbon steel alloys shall conform to requirements of Steel Products Manual and following 

standards: 

a. Structural Shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A36 

b. Sheet and Strip, cold rolled, structural quality: ASTM A611 

c. Sheet and Strip, hot rolled, structural quality: ASTM A570 

d. Sheet, hot dipped galvanized, structural quality: ASTM A446 

e. Sheet, electrolytic zinc coated: ASTM A591 

C. Fluoropolymer Coating: 

1. Coating material shall contain a formulation of not less than 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin. 

2. Color: Custom color to match sample provided by Architect 

3. Products: 

a. Akzo - Trinar 

b. Glidden - Nubelar 

c. Morton - Fluorocream 

d. PPG - Duranar [XL] 

e. Valspar - Fluropon 




1. To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and 

other work before shipment to Project Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for 

shipment and installation. 

2. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, 

surface treatment and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges. 

3. Exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design, with joints being 

accurately fitted and rigidly secured. 

4. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and joining to ensure concealment from view to greatest extent 

possible. 

B. All-Glass Entrances: 

1. Prior to tempering, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of 

openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges in 

accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat edges in field. 

2. Prepare glass panels for hardware by drilling, notching, and edging as required prior to tempering. 

3. Glass shall be tempered to increase flexural strength 4 to 5 times strength before treatment. 

4. Tolerances: 

a. Overall Size of Doors: +1/16"; -1/8" 

b. Thickness: ±1/32" 

C. Fluoropolymer Coating: 

1. Remove die markings prior to finishing operations. Perform this work in addition to finish specified. 

Scratches, abrasions dents and similar defects are unacceptable. 



A. Verification of Conditions: 

1. Examine substrates and parts of structure affecting installation of work. Do not proceed until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



1. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices at 

proper time so as to avoid delays to other work. 

B. All-Glass Entrances: 

1. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard pieces which have 

significant edge damage or face imperfections. 

2. Clean glazing channel, and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. 

Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces 

where elastomeric sealants are used. 

3. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 



1. Install all-glass entrance system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 


3.04 CLEANING 

2. Use a method of attachment to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate 

construction tolerances and irregularities. 

3. Provide alignment attachments and shims as required to fasten system to building structure. 

4. Fit, align, and adjust door assemblies plumb and level, to provide a smooth operation. 

5. Clearances: 

a. Door Head and Jambs: 1/8" 

b. Door Sills: 1/4" 

c. Butt Glazing Joints: 3/8", except between sidelights and all-glass transoms, which shall 

be 1/8" 

6. Installation of all glass entrance system shall be capable of withstanding impact from operation 

(doors), without failure, including loss or breakage of glass. 

A. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. 

B. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to substantial completion. Comply with 

glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. 


A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged. 

B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to framing 

and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. 



SECTION 08 70 00 - HARDWARE 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Work Included: Door hardware 





1. Before fabrication or delivery of hardware, submit 3 copies of hardware schedule. 

a. Supplier shall assume sole responsibility for provision, proper coordination and function 

of finish hardware required for openings, whether or not listed in schedule below. 

b. Architect's acceptance of hardware schedule shall not be construed as a complete check, 

nor shall it relieve supplier from responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions from 

code requirements, and need to satisfactorily complete Project. 

2. Submit 3 copies of keying schedule. 



1. Hardware supplier shall be a company specializing in distribution of contract hardware for a period 

of at least 5 years. 

2. Supplier shall have, on staff, a full time employee who is a member in good standing of Door and 

Hardware Institute and a Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. 


1. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 

3. National Fire Protection Association: 

a. NFPA 80 

b. NFPA 101 

c. NFPA 105 

C. Coordination: 

1. Before ordering materials, carefully examine scale, full size, and shop drawings of work requiring 

hardware, and verify that material selected will properly fit Work. 

2. Coordinate installation of electric hinges, locks, and security devices with installation of electrical 

connections. 

1.04 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish a 2 year factory warranty on door closers against defects in material and workmanship from Date of 

Substantial Completion. 



A. Hinges: 

1. Hager 

HARDWARE 08 70 00-1

2. McKinney 

3. Stanley Works 

B. Pivot Sets: 

1. Glynn-Johnson 

2. LCN 

3. McKinney 

4. Rixon-Firemark 

C. Locksets and Latchsets: 

Basis of design shall be Schlage; Lever D series, US26D finish 

1. Corbin-Russwin 

2. Sargent 

3. Yale 

4. Schlage 

D. Closers: 

1. Dorma 


3. LCN 

4. Norton 

5. Rixon-Firemark 

6. Sargent 

E. Push Plates and Pull Bars: 

1. Brookline 

2. Hiawatha 

3. Ives 

F. Stops, Wall Bumpers, and Silencers: 


2. Hiawatha 

3. Ives 

G. Roller Latches and Bolts: 


2. Ives 

H. Sliding/Pocket Door Track and Carriers: 

1. Richards Wilcox 

2. Stanley Works 

I. Thresholds, Door Bottoms, Seals and Stripping: 

1. National Guard Products Inc. 

2. Pemko Manufacturing co. 

3. Reese Enterprises Inc. 

4. Zero International Inc. 



1. Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish, and shall 

satisfactorily perform various functions required. 

2. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor hardware 

in position and match hardware as to material and finish. 

3. Should any hardware indicated to be installed on fire-rated doors not qualify for appropriate 

labeling because of design, or any other reason, notify Architect immediately. 

HARDWARE 08 70 00-2

B. Hinges: 

1. Provide full mortise, template, 5-knuckle hinges with anti-friction type bearing, conforming to ANSI 

A156.1. Doors with closers and doors in excess of 40" in width shall be furnished with hinges with 

oil-impregnated or ball type bearings. 

2. Exterior and entry doors shall have non-removable pins and extra heavy weight hinges. 

3. Doors with locksets shall be furnished with non-removable pins hinges. 

4. Hinges shall be furnished in following quantities: 

a. Doors up to 90" in height: 1 1/2 pair hinges 

b. Doors over 90" in height: Add 1 hinge for every additional 30" 

5. Furnish hinge sizes as follows for 1 3/4" thick doors: 

a. Doors up to 3'-0" wide: 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 

b. Doors 3'-0" to 3'-4" wide: 5 x 4 1/2 

c. Doors over 3'-4" wide: Extra heavy 5 x 4 1/2 

6. Where 20 minute doors are scheduled without closers, provide spring hinges. 

7. Finish: 

a. Opaque Finished Doors: As scheduled 

b. Transparent Finished Doors: As scheduled 

C. Overhead Closers: 

1. Surface mounted or concealed overhead closers shall be fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action 

with adjustable spring power, and high strength iron cylinder conforming to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. 

2. Furnish complete with metal covers, forged steel arms, necessary brackets and thru-bolt fasteners 

for top of door surface mounted units. 

3. Provide parallel arms where required. 

4. Closers shall be sized in accordance with requirements for accessibility for handicapped and 

recommendations of manufacturer. 

a. Maximum Opening Force: 

i) Interior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 5.0 lbs. 

ii) Exterior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 8.5 lbs. 

b. Estimated Closing Force: (based on 36" door and 60% efficiency) 

i) Interior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 3.0 lbs. 

ii) Exterior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 5.1 lbs. 

5. Finish: Enamel for surface mounted units to match door hardware 

D. Exit Devices: 

1. Exit devices shall conform to ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 and shall be listed by UL for accident and 

hazard. 

2. Devices shall be push through type, touch pad design with a straight action pad. Compression 

springs shall be stainless steel and internal parts zinc dichromate coated to prevent corrosion. 

3. Devices shall be capable of electric latch retraction or electric control of outside trim. 

E. Auxiliary Hardware: Conform to ANSI A156.16 

1. Interior Stops: 

a. Wall-mounted stop where doors strike walls; 1" diameter 

b. Floor-mounted stop at locations where wall stops cannot be used 

c. Finish: As scheduled 

2. Silencers: 

a. Tamper proof resilient cushions designed to absorb shock and noise. 

b. Provide 3 silencers per single door, and 2 for pairs of doors. 




HARDWARE 08 70 00-3


1. Examine doors, frame, and related items for conditions that would prevent proper application of 

hardware. 




1. Securely install finish hardware items in accordance with accepted schedule and templates 

furnished with hardware. 

2. Finish of exposed fasteners shall match finish of hardware item. 

3. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces. 

4. Locate items in accordance with Door and Hardware Institute publications. 

5. Provide blocking, steel plates or additional studs at all wall door stop locations to absorb impact 

and prevent damage to wall surface. 

B. Keying: 

1. Verify keying requirements with Owner and Tenant. 

2. Master and grand master keys shall be delivered to Owner or his representative. 

3. Locksets shall be construction master keyed for use during construction. 

4. Furnish keys for locks as follows: 

a. Grand Master Keys: 6 total 

b. Master Keys: 6 per set 

c. Change Keys: 3 per lock 

d. Construction Master Keys: 12 total 

3.03 ADJUSTING 

A. Final Adjustment: 

1. Before final completion, adjust hardware so that doors operate in perfect order. Test and adjust 

hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding, or rattling. Adjust closers for proper, 

smooth operation. 

2. Exposed hardware shall be carefully cleaned by methods not injurious to finish, immediately 

preceding occupancy. Replace defective, damaged, or missing hardware. 

3. At final completion, properly tag and identify keys and deliver to Owner and/or Tenant. 

3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. To define requirements for materials, size, and design, specific products of certain manufacturers have been 

listed above. Equivalent products of other acceptable manufacturers listed above may be provided. 

B. The Contractor shall engage an Architectural Hardware Consultant to prepare schedules of all hardware 

components necessary to suit the particular location and function of the doors indicated in the Drawings and 

hardware schedule therein based on the Basis of Design and the descriptions identified on the Hardware 

Schedule sheet A601. 


HARDWARE 08 70 00-4

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Work Included: Glass and Decorative Films as shown on the drawings 




B. Samples: 

1. Submit 2 samples of each type of glass other than clear glass; sample size shall be 12" x 12". 



1. Installer shall be a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in glazing work similar to 

required work. 

1. When a manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in 

manufacture of glass and glazing products with a minimum of 5 years experience. 

2. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of glass and glazing products 

and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer 

shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 


1. Comply with recommendations and requirements of following: 

a. FGMA Architect's Guide to Glass, Metal, and Glazing 

b. FGMA Glazing Manual 

c. FGMA - Sealant Manual 

d. LSGA - Standards Manual 

2. Safety Glazing Materials: 

a. Provide glazing at Hazardous Locations as determined by CPSC 16 CFR 1201. Glazing 

shall be in accordance with Consumer Product Safety Act and shall have been tested 

and labeled. 

b. Safety glazing shall conform to requirements of ANSI Z97.1. 


A. Field Measurements: 

1. Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication. Manufacturer shall be responsible for details and 

dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall indicate all required field measurements 

beyond his control. Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these 

field dimensions. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Upon notification of defects, within warranty period, replace glass and glazing at no additional cost to Owner. 

B. Provide written warranties as follows: 

1. Laminated and Tempered Safety Glass: 

GLAZING 08 80 00-1

a. 5 year warranty period 

b. Warranty against delamination (Laminated only) 



A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material selections. 


A. Flat Glass Products: 

1. Cardinal 

2. Falconer Glass Industries 

3. Guardian Industries 

4. LOF Glass, Libby - Owens - Ford Co. 

5. PPG Industries 

6. Spectrum Glass Co. 

7. Sunglas Products Inc. - SPI 

8. Tempglass 

B. Patterned Glass Products: 

1. AFG Industries Inc. 

2. S.A. Bendheim 

3. Hordis Brothers 

4. Rudy Art Glass Studio 

C. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: 

1. Cadillac Rubber & Plastics 

2. Morton Thiokol Inc. 


4. Rubber Trim Products 

5. Santoprene 


D. Mirror Mastics and Sealers: 

1. C.A. Gunther Co. 

2. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. 

3. Palmer Product Corp. 

4. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc. 

E. Glazing Film: 

1. 3M 

2. Approved equal 

2.03 ACCESSORIES 


1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendation for selection of hardness, depending upon location of 

each application, conditions at time of installation and performance requirements indicated. 

2. Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces and other materials contacted in 

installation. 


GLAZING 08 80 00-2


1. Cut glass to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bit on glass as recommended by 

glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at 

manufacturer's option. 

2. When glass is to be pre-cut to sizes obtained from shop drawings, take field measurements of each 

opening, before glazing to verify adequate bite of glass and minimum edge clearance. 




1. Examine framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions 

under which glazing is to be performed. 

2. Remedy conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with 

glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 



1. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and 

other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, 

and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. 

2 Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as 

possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in same direction as 

other pieces. 

3. Do not use two different glazing materials in same joint system unless manufacturer of each 

material has verified compatibility in writing. 

B. Setting Blocks, Edge Blocks, and Spacers: 

1. Two setting blocks shall be placed under lower edge of each light of fixed glass. They shall be 

sized to limit load from glass to 60 psi, but in no case, less than 4" in length. 

2. Setting blocks shall be equidistant from center of glass, preferably at quarter point locations 

3. Edge blocks a minimum of 4" long shall be located at both jambs of glass with a minimum of two 

per jamb. 

4. Spacers shall be one of following two types: 

a. Short lengths of elastomeric material, 1" to 3" in length, spaced approximately 24" on 

center around perimeter on each side of glass panels to center them in channel. 

b. Continuous elastomeric rod, strip, or spline extended around entire perimeter of glass 

panel. A hard sealant tape may also act as a spacer. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application. 

B. Remove non-permanent labels from glass surfaces. 

C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to substantial completion. Comply with 

glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. 


A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged. 

GLAZING 08 80 00-3

B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to 

framing and held away from glass. Do not apply tape or other markers to surfaces of glass. 


GLAZING 08 80 00-4

.SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 

2. Gypsum board and related products. 

3. Interior Trim. 

4. Aluminum Trim. 

5. Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation. 

6. Semi-rigid Glass Fiber Insulation 

7. Acoustical Sealant. 


A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and C36 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not 

defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product provided. 

B. Samples: For the following products: 

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory provided. 



1. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of gypsum board products and shall 

demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on 

Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 


a. To greatest extent possible, materials, including gypsum board, adhesives, and accessories shall be 

products of one manufacturer or items standard with manufacturer of gypsum board. 

b. Provide primers and other undercoat materials which are produced or are specifically recommended 

by manufacturer to ensure compatibility. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials 

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing 

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 1

C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 

D. Installation Characteristics. Gypsum board assemblies shall be installed in accordance with Gypsum Association 

Manuals, GA-201, “ Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings”, GA-216, “Application and Finishing of Gypsum 

Board”, GA-223, “Gypsum Board Panel Product Types, Uses, Sizes, and Standards”, GA-226, “Application of 

Gypsum Board to form Curved Surfaces”, GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual.". 


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer 

or supplier. 

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, 

surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent 

sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written 

recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 



A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond 

with support system indicated. Material to be provided pre-cut to full wall height where possible to minimize waste 

and field cutting of panels. 


A. The following requirements apply for product selection: 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 

B. Manufacturers: 

1. Steel Framing and Furring: 

a. Clark Steel Framing Systems 

b. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. 

c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 

d. Marino/Ware 

e. National Gypsum Company. 

f. United States Gypsum Co. 

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: 

a. G-P Gypsum Corp. 

b. National Gypsum Company. 


c. United States Gypsum Co. 

3. Interior Trim: 

a. Dale Industries, Inc. – Dale-Incor. 

b. Flannery, Inc. 

c. G-P Gypsum Corp. 

d. National Gypsum Company. 

e. United States Gypsum Co. 

4. Aluminum Trim: 

a. Fry Reglet Corp. 

b. MM Systems Corporation. 

c. Pittcon Industries. 

d. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A- Schedule of Materials. 

5. Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation: 

a. Fibrex. 

b. Owens Corning. 

c. United States Gypsum Co. 

6. Semi-rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 

a. Certain-Teed 

b. Johns Mansville 

c. Owens Corning. 

7. Acoustical Sealant: 

a. Bostik. 

b. Pecora. 

c. Tremco 

d. United States Gypsum Co. 

2.3 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double 

strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 

C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and 

capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by 

testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. 

a. Type: Post installed, chemical or expansion anchor. 

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, 

with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, 

a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 

by a qualified independent testing agency. 

D. Hangers: As follows: 

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter. 

2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel. 

a. Diameter: 1/4-inch (6.34-mm). 

b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized. 

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc 

coating. 

1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide 

flange, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep. 

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge). 


. Depth: As indicated. 

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge). 

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. 

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web). 

2.4 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Components, General: As follows: 

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer’s 

standard zinc coating. 

3. Metal stud partition size, gauge and limiting heights shall be sized for a maximum allowable deflection of 

1/240. 

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. and 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge). 

2. Depth: As indicated. 

C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges. 

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge). 

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 

2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm). 

F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound 

transmission. 

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web). 

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide 

flange. 

1. Depth: 3/4 inch or 1 ½ inch as required. 

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 

0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or 

double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 

H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 

7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation 

thickness indicated. 

I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties 

required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

2.5 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD 

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond 

with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 


1. Regular Type: 

a. Thickness: As indicated. 

b. Long Edges: Tapered. 

c. Location: As indicated. 

2. Type X: 

a. Thickness: As indicated. 

b. Long Edges: Tapered. 

c. Location: As indicated. 

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel 

sheet. 

2. Shapes: 

a. Corner bead: Use at outside corners. 

b. Edge Trim and Finish System: 

1) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel 

edges. 

2) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges 

where LC-Bead is not adequate. 

3) Fast Mask. Use where indicated or in locations selected by contractor. 

c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. 

d. Curved-Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. 

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated 

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 

(ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5. 

2. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 

2.7 SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BATT INSULATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C665, Type I 

B. Facing: Unfaced, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Thickness: As Indicated. 

D. Size: 16” or 24” (as required to fit framing) x 48” 

E. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled constitutes a minimum of 20 percent by weight. 

F. Products: 

a. Fibrex – Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB) 

b. Owens Corning – Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB) 

c. United States Gypsum Co.- Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket (SAFB) 

2.8 SEMI-RIGID GLASS FIBER INSULATION 

A. General: Comply with UL 723 and ASTM C423 


B. Facing: FSK (foil/scrim/kraft). 

C. Thickness: 1” nominal, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Products: 

a. Certain-Teed – CertaPro Commercial Board CB-300 

b. Johns Mansville – Spin-Glas Board 

c. Owens Corning – Fiberglass 703 

2.9 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other 

compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type 

taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use 

drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping 

compounds. 

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 

2.10 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 

A. VOC Content: Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 50, 

Subpart D. 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 

a. Bostik, Chem-Calk 600. 

b. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 

c. Tremco, Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant. 

d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

e. 

C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with 

ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building 

construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 

2.11 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous 

substrate. 

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch 

(0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. 

D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam 

displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 

E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 



A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, 

and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with 

installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to 

ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling 

hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time 

needed for coordination and construction. 

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to 

surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, 

provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of 

gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is 

required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, 

equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with 

details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United 

States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." 


C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural 

movement. 

1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 

2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at 

head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. 

a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. 

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints 

independently. 

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not 

part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss 

obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 

means. 

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere 

with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental 

suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension 

members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced 

standards. 

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other 

devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause 

them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 

4. Secure rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, 

or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner 

that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that 

extend through forms. 

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 

7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof decks. Attach hangers to structural members. 

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment 

are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and transversely 

between parallel members. 

C. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. 

D. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the 

referenced steel framing and installation standards. 

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 

2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 

E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical 

surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut 

other construction. 


1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and 

wall. 

B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where 

partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings 

and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 

1. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks 

or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other 

members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to 

make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 

a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. 

C. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to 

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 

D. Curved Partitions: 

1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50-mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting 

lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. 

2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 

3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1-inch- (25-mm-) high-by-thickness of track 

metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 

4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing 

recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less 

than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 

E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written 

recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; 

install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 

1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Z-Furring Members: 

1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, 

screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; 

on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior 

corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. 

3.6 INSTALLING SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies 

indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other 

support. 

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, 

bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar 

items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 

1. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing 

strip with 0.0312-inch (0.79-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and 

secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel. 


D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required 

to enclose rods. 

E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel 

framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call 

buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. 

F. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity 

of fire-rated construction. 

G. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies. 

H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and 

at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure 

differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent. 

3.7 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels 

have been installed on one side. 

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end 

joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing 

member. 

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more 

than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum 

board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger 

vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed 

openings. 

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges 

of stud flanges first. 

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), 

except in chases braced internally. 

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be 

accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 

3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting 

below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and 

other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 


J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 

1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of 

gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and 

penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at 

perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for 

locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including 

sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. 

M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 

3.8 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS 

A. Single-Layer Application: 

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and 

at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels either vertically, horizontally, or as indicated or required by fireresistance-rated 

assembly, and minimize end joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required 

by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge 

joints over furring members. 

B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on 

walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and 

offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless 

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically 

(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least 

one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated 

assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 

1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel 

to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. 

Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 

D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 

F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, 

joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written 

recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 

G. Curved Partitions: 

1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300- 

mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 


2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. 

Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, 

stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 

3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to 

studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve 

and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 

4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center 

gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 

mm) o.c. 

5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. 

3.9 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. 

Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Control Joints: 

1. Break panel behind joint and back by double framing member. Apply acoustical sealant to fill gap and attach 

control joint to face layer with 9/16” galvanized staples spaced 6” o.c. on both flanges along entire length of 

joint. 

2. Install in ceiling areas exceeding 2,500 square feet. Distance between ceiling control joints shall not exceed 

50”-0” in either direction. A control joints shall be installed where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. 

3. Distance between control joints in partitions and furring shall not exceed 30’-0”, and a control joint occurs in 

structure and exterior wall. Partition height door frames may be considered a control joint. 

3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface 

defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint 

compound from adjacent surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: 

1. Typical finish level for exposed to view locations where flat paints, light textures or wall coverings are to be 

applied: 

a. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, 

fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks, 

ridges and other blemishes. 

2. Typical finish level for exposed to view locations where gloss, semi gloss, enamel or non textured flat paints 

are specified; where severe lighting conditions occur or where noted on drawings. Severe lighting may 

include overhead or side wall washers. 

a. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape. Apply 

skim coat to entire surface. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks, ridges and other 

blemishes. Apply drywall primer to prepared surface before application of finish paint. 



SECTION 09 31 00 - TILE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 

2. Quarry tile. 

3. Paver tile. 

4. Glazed wall tile. 

5. Porcelain tile. 

6. Glass tile 

7. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 

8. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations. 

9. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. 


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as 

determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 

2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 

3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. 



B. Samples for Verification: 

1. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish 

required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or 

colors approved for completed work. 

2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 

3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 

4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 

C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 

1. Submit recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions for tile and grout materials being provided and 

include a copy of instructions in Operation and Maintenance Data binder. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 1



1. Installer shall be a company specializing in tile work with a minimum of 5 years experience. Mechanics used 

to set tile shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of tile setting and shall 

demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. 

B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. 

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each 

contiguous area. 

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, 

adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. 

D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one 

source from a single manufacturer for each product: 

1. Stone thresholds. 

2. Waterproofing. 

3. Joint sealants. 

4. Metal edge strips. 

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 

Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. 

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 

D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting 

backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding 

surfaces before setting tile. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and 

humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS 

TILE 09 30 00 - 2

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering 

for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, for each type, 

composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 



A. See Appendix A – Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and product selections. 




2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specified products by one of the 

manufacturers specified. 


1. Tile Products : 

a. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 

b. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. 

c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

d. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

e. Manufacturer Listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

2. Waterproofing: 

a. Boiardi Products Corporation. 

b. Bostik 

c. Compotite Corporation. 

d. Custom Building Products 

e. LATICRETE International Inc. 

f. MAPEI Corporation. 

g. National Applied Construction Products, Inc. 

h. Schluter Systems L.P. 

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

k. TEC Specialty Products Inc 

l. The Noble Company. 

3. Setting and Grouting Materials: 

a. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 

b. Boiardi Products Corporation. 

c. Bonsal, W.R. Company. 

d. Custom Building Products 

e. LATICRETE International Inc. 


g. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

h. Manufacturer Listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 3

4. Elastomeric Sealants: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation. 

b. GE Silicones. 

c. Pecora Corporation. 

d. Tremco, Inc. 

5. Grout Sealer: 

a. Bonsal, W. R., Company 

b. Bostik. 

c. C-Cure. 

d. Custom Building Products. 

e. Jamo Inc. 


g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

i. TEC Specialty Products Inc 

2.3 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for 

types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in 

"Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. 

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other 

products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide 

specific products or materials complying with the requirements of Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in 

factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other 

packages and match approved Samples. 

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Retain subparagraph below if tile is used in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas. According to 

ANSI A137.1, manufacturers must specify whether back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies are suitable for 

these installations. 

2. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless 

tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a 

record of successful in-service performance. 

2.4 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Trim Units: Match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile 

where applicable 

TILE 09 30 00 - 4

2.5 THRESHOLDS 

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 

inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 

B. See Appendix A – Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and product selections 

1. Granite Thresholds: Comply with ASTM C 615 

2. Marble Thresholds: Comply with ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 

or ASTM C 241. 

3. Slate Thresholds: ASTM C 629, Classification II Interior. 

2.6 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following. 

B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with highstrength, 

nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 

0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS. 

C. PVC-Sheet Product: Two layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of bondable nonwoven polyester, 

for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 0.040-inch (1.01-mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Product: Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold. 

D. Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing for adhering to latex-portland 

cement mortar; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 0.008-inch (0.203-mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI. 

E. Corrugated-Polyethylene Product: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations for adhering to latexportland 

cement mortar and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 3/16-inch (4- 

mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA. 

F. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous-Sheet Product: Self-adhering SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with woven 

reinforcement facing for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 0.040-inch (1.01-mm) 

nominal thickness. 

1. Product: National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex. 

G. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and fabric reinforcement. 

1. Products: 

a. Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. 

b. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. 

c. MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19. 

d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000. 

H. Latex-Portland Cement Product: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and acrylic-latex additive. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 5

1. Products: 

a. Boiardi Products Corporation; Elastiment 323. 

b. MAPEI Corporation; PRP 315. 

c. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100. 

d. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-324, Triple Flex. 

I. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for 

trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process. 

1. Products: 

a. Bostik; Hydroment Ultra-Set. 

b. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Deck-Seal 1000. 

2.7 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified below: 

1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 

4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick. 

2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by 0.062-inch 

(1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 

B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 

1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the 

other requirements in ANSI A118.1. 

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water 

must be added at Project site. 

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive. 

a. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to 

the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 

D. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with physical properties 

equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of medium-bed specimens according to 

ANSI A118.4: 

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water 

must be added at Project site. 

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive. 

E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 

F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. 

G. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as 

required to produce color indicated. 

H. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

I. Standard Un-sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 6

J. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 

1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 

2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged drygrout 

mix. 

3. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry 

ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged drygrout 

mix. 

a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower. 

b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider. 

K. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same silicone rubber used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 

2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and 

characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as 

applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic 

tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme 

temperatures. 

1. Products: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. 

b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. 

c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. 

d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White. 

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as 

applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 

1. Products: 

a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. 

b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245. 

c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. 

d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900. 

2.9 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS 

A. Refer to Section 09260 for specifications. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided 

or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 7

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal 

and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, exposed-edge material. See Appendix A – 

Schedule of Materials for material and finish. 

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, 

specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of 

grout. 

1. Products: 

a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer. 

b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. 

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. 

d. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer. 

e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer. 

f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. 

g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. 

h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. 

i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 

2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to 

produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and 

within flatness tolerances required below: 

a. Mortar Bed: 

1) Sub-floor Surfaces: 1/4" in 10'-0" 

2) Walls and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/4" in 8'-0" 

TILE 09 30 00 - 8

. Thin-Set: 


2) Vertical Surfaces: 1/8" in 8'-0" 

c. Organic Adhesives: 


2) Walls and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/8" in 8'-0" 

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and 

similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, 

adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



1. Protect adjacent surfaces during work of this Section. 

2. Close tiled areas to traffic until setting and grouting materials have cured to manufacturer's 

recommendations. 

B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials. 

C. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that complies with flatness 

tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting 

material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material 

manufacturer. 

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has 

been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken 

from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend 

tiles at Project site before installing. 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic 

Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation 

schedules. 

B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation 

methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without 

interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without 

disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 9

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. 

Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to 

electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, 

walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall 

area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints 

between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation 

joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after 

installing tiles. 

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland 

cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 

I. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 

and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce 

waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 

B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 

3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing 

TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for 

providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 

a. Tile floors in wet areas. 

b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. 

c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A. 

3. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 10

C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed 

above adjacent non-tile floor finish. 

2. Installation to conform with TCNA TR 611. 

D. Curing: 

1. Damp cure tile installations for a minimum of 72 hours. 

E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other 

flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 

F. Elastomeric Sealant Joints: 

1. Seal joints according to sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 

2. Force sealant into joint and against side of joint to make uniform. Fill sealant space completely with sealant. 

3. Tool joints to form smooth uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces within 10 minutes after sealant 

application. Finished joint shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without pinholes, voids, or low spots. 

G. Expansion Joints: 

1. Joint Width: 

a. Quarry Tile : Same as grout joint; but not less than 1/4" 

b. Ceramic Tile: 1/4" preferred; but not less than 1/8" 

c. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints shall be same width as structural joint. 

2. Install expansion joints as shown or as required by setting method. Conform to TCNA EJ171. 

3. Install expansion joints at expansion, control and seismic joints in structure 

4. Expansion joints shall be constructed during installation of mortar bed and/or tile. Do not cut joints after tile 

installation. 

5. Keep joint cavities open and free of dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and setting materials. Set compressible backup 

strip when mortar is placed, or utilize a removable wood strip to provide space for back-up after mortar 

has cured. 

H. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As 

soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that have gotten on tile faces by 

wiping with soft cloth. 

3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, 

including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. 

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

3. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A.. 

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 

TILE 09 30 00 - 11

1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no 

sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and 

only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be 

cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean 

water before and after cleaning. 

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 

Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, 

damage, and wear. 

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. 

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 

E. Protect walls from impact, vibrations and heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite walls for at least 14 days 

following installation. 

3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Refer to the following schedule to select method of installation unless TCNA Method No. is indicated on the 

drawings. Also comply with Flatness Tolerance specified in 3.1.A.1 

INTERIOR FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION METHODS 

RECOMMENDED SUB FLOOR RECOMMENDED USES TYPE TCNA Method 

No. 

Pre-cast concrete floor system At listed sub floors where depressed 

Cement Mortar 

F 111 

Post tensioned concrete floor system 

Floor subject to movement or deflection 

slab is provided Cleavage Membrane 

Slab-on-grade where no bending At listed sub floor where de- 

Cement Mortar 

F112 

stress occur 

Slab-on-grade where no bending 

stress occur 

Above- grade concrete with deflection 

not to exceed 1/360 of span 

Above- grade concrete or wood subfloor 

Above- grade concrete 

pressed slab is provided 

At listed sub floors in dry areas 

only; where no depressed 

slab is provided 

At listed sub floors in wet areas 

where depressed slab is 

provided 

At listed sub floors in wet areas 

where no depressed slab is 

provided 

Bonded 

Thin Set / Organic Adhesive 

Cement Mortar Bed 

Waterproof membrane 

Thin-Set 

Waterproof Membrane 

LIMITATION: Please be aware that above installations are not for Food or Chemical resistant areas. 

F 116 

F 121 

F 122 

3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Refer to the following schedule to select method of installation unless TCNA Method No. is indicated on the 

drawings. Also comply with Flatness Tolerance specified in 3.1.A.1 

TILE 09 30 00 - 12

INTERIOR WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS 

RECOMMENDED BACKING 

Gypsum Board screwed to metal studs, 

single or double layer installed according 

to GA-216. Minimum Gypsum Board 

thickness – ½” 

Cementitious Backer Unit/Fiber Cement 

Underlayment. 

Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum 

Board Backer Board 

RECOMMENDED 

USES 

For dry areas only 

For wet or dry areas 

For wet or dry areas 

TYPE 

Gypsum Board Organic 

Adhesive 

Cementitious Backer 

Unit/Fiber Cement Underlayment. 

Thin-Set 

Membrane in wet areas. 

Coated Glass Mat Water- 

Resistant Gypsum Backer 

Board. Thin-Set 

TCNA Method 

No. 

W 242 

W 244 

W 245 


TILE 09 30 00 - 13

SECTION 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Suspended metal grid system 

2. Acoustical ceiling units 






1. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of acoustical ceiling 

systems and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. 

Installer shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 

2. To greatest extent possible, materials, including acoustical ceiling units, exposed wall moldings, 

suspension system, and accessories, shall be products of one manufacturer or items standard with 

manufacturer of acoustical ceiling panel units. 

3. Cast acoustical ceiling units shall be products of the same run. 


1. Fire Rated Assembly: 

a. Install fire rated components in strict compliance with requirements of UL. Materials shall 

bear UL Classification Marking. No deviations from UL assembly shall be allowed. 

1.04 MAINTENANCE 

A. Extra Materials: 

1. Upon completion of Project, supply Owner with an amount of extra acoustical ceiling units equal to 

1% to 2% of total quantity of each type installed. Extra stock shall be provided in clean, clearly 

marked cartons for Owner's future use. 



A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material 

selections. 


A. Suspension System: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 

3. USG Interiors (Donn) 

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1

B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. Celotex Corp. 

3. USG Interiors 




1. Examine areas and conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed. Verify that 

layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 


3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation 

means acceptance of existing conditions. 



1. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this section. 

2. Install ceiling system in a true, even plane and in straight courses as indicated on Drawings. 

3. Coordinate and fit ceiling components to grilles, lighting fixtures, and other related items. In 

determining location and spacing of hangers and primary runners, take into consideration weight of 

grilles, light fixtures, etc., that are to be installed in conjunction with acoustical ceilings. 

4. Provide stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge mouldings required for a complete installation. 

B. Suspension System: 

1. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members 

are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 

2. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected 

hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. 

3. Locate system on room axis leaving equal border units. 

4. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to 

exceed maximum deflection limitations. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located 

within 6" of each corner; or support components independently. 

5. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 

6. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest 

practical lengths. Provide moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Miter corners where wall 

moldings intersect, or install corner caps. 

C. Acoustical Ceiling Units: 

1. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance 

and function. 

2. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 

3. For tegular or reveal edged units, cut a reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling units at borders and 

vertical surfaces. 

4. Lay directional patterned units in basket weave pattern. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 

D. Tolerances: 

1. Deflection of grid components shall not exceed 1/360 of span. 

2. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8" in 10 feet maximum 

3. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members: 2° maximum; caused by eccentric loads 


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2

SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). 

2. Resilient wall base and accessories. 



B. Samples for Verification: Submit no less than 2 samples for each type of product selected and of size indicated 

below: 

1. Tile: full size units. 

2. Sheet: 6-by-9-inch (150-by-225-mm) sections of floor covering. 

3. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches 

(300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. 

4. Seams: For seamless installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern 

required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) Sample applied to a 

rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. 

C. Shop Drawings: For sheet floor coverings indicating the floor covering direction and seam locations. 

D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of resilient flooring and base and shall 

demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on Project, 

mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 

B. When Static-control Resilient Floor Covering is specified the Installer must employ workers for this Project that are 

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for static-control floor covering installation and seaming method 

indicated. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test 

method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 1


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient 

temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more 

than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 

1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 

2. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright. 


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more 

than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor covering during the following time periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

55 deg F (13 deg C) Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). 

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and 48 hours after floor covering installation. 

D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering 

for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each color, pattern, and size 

of floor tile installed. 

2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (152 linear m) 

or fraction thereof, in roll form for each color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering installed. 

3. Furnish not less than 5 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of 

each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 



A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and material selections. 




2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 



1. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile 

a. Amtico International Inc.. 

b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

c. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 

d. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 

e. Roppe Corporation. 

f. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

2. Vinyl Composition Tile 

a. Allstate Rubber Corp. 

b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

c. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 

d. Mannington. 

e. Tarkett Inc. 

f. VPI, LLC. 

g. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

3. Rubber Floor Tile 

a. Allstate Rubber Corp. 

b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 

c. Endura Rubber Flooring. 

d. Johnsonite. 

e. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 

f. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 

g. Roppe Corporation. 

h. VPI, LLC. 

i. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

4. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering 

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

b. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 

c. Congoleum Corporation. 

d. Forbo Industries, Inc. 

e. Johnsonite. 

f. Lonseal, Inc. 

g. Mannington Mills, Inc. 

h. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 

i. Tarkett Inc. 

j. TOLI International. 

k. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

5. Sheet Rubber Floor Covering 

a. Johnsonite 

b. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 

c. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 

d. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 

6. Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings 

a. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile 

1) AB ElectroStatic, American Biltrite (Canada). 

2) Forbo Industries, Inc. 

3) Marley Flexco (USA). 

4) VPI, LLC. 

5) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials. 


. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile 

1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 


c. Static-Dissipative Rubber Floor Tile 

1) Nora Rubber Flooring. 

2) Pirelli Rubber Flooring. 


d. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering 

1) Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 

2) Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc. 


e. Static-Dissipative Rubber Sheet Floor Covering 

1) Nora Rubber Flooring. 

2) Pirelli Rubber Flooring. 


f. Static-Dissipative Recycled Rubber Sheet Floor Covering 

1) United Technical Products, Inc.; ESD FlexFloor. 


7. Resilient wall Base 

1) Allstate Rubber Corp. 

2) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

3) Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 

4) Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 

5) Johnsonite. 

6) Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 

7) Roppe Corporation. 

8) VPI, LLC. 


8. Resilient Molding Accessory 

1) Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 

2) Johnsonite. 

3) Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 

4) Roppe Corporation. 


2.3 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE 

A. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700. 

B. Class: As indicated by product designations. 

C. Type, thickness and Size: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 

A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066. 



C. Wearing Surface: As indicated by product designations. 

D. Type, thickness and size: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.5 RUBBER FLOOR TILE 

A. Rubber Floor Tile: ASTM F 1344. 


C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240. 

D. Wearing Surface , type, thickness and size: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.6 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING 

A. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 

B. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering With Backing: ASTM F 1303. 

C. Color and pattern: As indicated in Appendix A. 

D. Wearing Surface, Sheet Width and Seaming Method: As indicated by product designation. 

E. Seaming Method: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.7 SHEET RUBBER FLOOR COVERING 

A. Hardness: ASTM D 2240. Not less than 85 Shore A. 

B. Slip resistance: ASTM D 2047 

C. Static Load Limit: ASTM F 970 

D. Color and pattern: As indicated in Appendix A. 

E. Wearing Surface, Sheet Width and Seaming Method: As indicated by product designation. 

F. Seaming Method: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.8 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 

A. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth surface); in 

manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick. 

B. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066 (VCT, non-asbestos formulated), Class 2 (throughpattern 

tile); tiles 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 


C. Static-Dissipative Rubber Floor Tile: ASTM F 1344, except in manufacturer's standard hardness when tested per 

ASTM D 2240 using Shore, Type A durometer. 

1. Raised-Disc Tile: Class I-A (homogenous rubber, solid color); tiles 39.37 by 39.37 inches (1000 by 1000 

mm); 0.20-inch (5.0-mm) overall thickness, 0.19-inch (4.7-mm) base thickness. 

2. Hammered-Surface Textured Tile: Class I-B (homogenous rubber, through-mottled pattern). 

3. Smooth or Textured Surface Tile: Class I-B (homogenous rubber, through-mottled pattern). 

D. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 (unbacked) or ASTM F 1303, Type II, Grade I, Class B 

(nonfoamed plastic backing); in manufacturer's standard roll size; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less 

than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick. 

E. Static-Dissipative Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859, Type I (homogenous); in manufacturer's standard 

roll width and length; not less than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm). 

F. Static-Dissipative Recycled Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: Manufactured from post-consumer tire rubber; in 

manufacturer's standard roll width and length; 0.20 inch (5.0 mm) thick. 

G. Static-Control Properties: 

1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage. 

a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when test specimens are 

tested surface to ground. 

b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when installed floor 

coverings are tested surface to ground. 

2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with 

conductive footwear. 

3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD-101/4046.1. 

H. Color: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.9 RESILIENT WALL BASE 

A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 

B. Type (Material Requirement): As indicated in Appendix A. 

C. Group (Manufacturing Method): As indicated by product designation. 

D. Style, minimum thickness and height: As indicated in Appendix A. 

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or premolded. 

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. 

H. Surface: Smooth. 

2.10 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY 


A. Description: As indicated in Appendix A. 

B. Material, profile, color and dimensions: As indicated in Appendix A. 

2.11 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement 

based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions 

indicated. 

1. Use adhesive that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 50, 

Subpart D: 

a. VCT Tile Adhesive: Not more than 50 g/L. 

b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. 

C. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive product of floor covering manufacturer that produces conductive continuity of 

floor covering system. 

D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 

1. Color: Match floor covering. 

E. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 

2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 

F. Static-Control Grounding Strips: Provided and approved by floor covering manufacturer and that produce conductive 

continuity of floor covering system to ground connection. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture 

content, and other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections 

and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere 

with adhesion of resilient products. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation 

only after substrates pass testing. 


3. Moisture Testing: 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after 

substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of 

water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. 

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass 

testing. 

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, 

oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 

D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access 

flooring manufacturer. 

E. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 

F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in 

advance of installation. 

1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 

G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After 

cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Arrange for manufacturer's representative to oversee installation of static-control resilient floor coverings. 

B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including 

built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. 

C. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 

D. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Install edge strips 

at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. 

E. Where movable partitions are shown, install resilient flooring before partitions are erected. 

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor 

tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 

G. Adhere floor coverings substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed 

installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and 

other surface imperfections. 

H. Immediately after installation of resilient flooring, roll floor in both directions with a 100 to 150 pound, three section 

roller to insure full contact between adhesive and flooring. 

3.4 TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges 

of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at 

perimeter. 

1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated in drawings. 


B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and 

packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated in drawings. 

C. Static-Control Tiles: In each space where conductive solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance tile 

identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Architect. 

3.5 SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS INSTALLATION 

A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. 

B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows: 

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm) 

away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 

4. Avoid cross seams. 

C. Seamless Installation: 

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to 

permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce 

surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 

2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections 

into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without 

gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on floor covering surfaces. 

D. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at 

horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 

3.6 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required 

in drawings. 

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 

C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal 

and vertical substrates. 

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. 

E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's 

recommended adhesive filler material. 

F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. 

G. Job-Formed Corners: 

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration 

(whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to 

length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base 

thickness. 


2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped 

notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to 

produce a snug fit to substrate. 

3.7 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each 

piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and 

placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods 

recommended in writing by manufacturer. 

1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface 

blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. 

a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. 

b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 

2. Static-control Resilient Floor Coverings: 

a. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings. 

b. If recommended in writing by static-control resilient floor tile manufacturer, apply protective staticcontrol 

floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance tile's electrical properties to tile surfaces that 

are free from soil, adhesive, and surface blemishes. 

1) Verify that both polish and its application method are approved by tile manufacturer and that 

polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces tile's effectiveness for static control. 

3. Prohibit heavy traffic on floor finish for a minimum of 72 hours after installation. 

4. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial 

Completion 

5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over 

flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving 

panels. 



SECTION 09 68 13 - CARPET TILING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes modular, fusion-bonded tufted carpet tile and resilient molding accessory. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, 

durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 

1. Columns, doorways,enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required 

in carpet tiles. 

2. Existing flooring materials to remain, where applicable. 

3. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 

4. Type of subfloor. 

5. Type of installation. 

6. Pattern of installation and type of adhesive to be used. 

7. Pattern type, location, and direction. 

8. Pile direction. 

9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 

10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 

11. Transition details to other flooring materials. 

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with 

manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 

3. Resilient Molding Accessory when required: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for approval and color 

selection. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and 

manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 1



1. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of specified method and shall demonstrate 

a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on Project, 

mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 


a. To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of one manufacturer or items standard with 

manufacturer of carpet tile. 

b. Provide primers and other undercoat materials which are produced or are specifically recommended 

by manufacturer of adhesives to ensure compatibility of system. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated by each 

specified carpet tile manufacturer, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Provide products that comply with the Consumer Product Safety Commission CPSC FF-1 Surface Flammability of 

Carpets and Rugs. 

D. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial 

Completion. 


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient 

temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended 

use. 

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive 

and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles 

before installing these items. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 

components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, 

vandalism, or abuse. 

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, 

loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination. 


3. Provide a written warranty covering repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship for a 

period of 2 years from Date of Substantial Completion. Reinstall carpet that is wrinkled and correct seam 

failures and other conditions due to faulty installation at no additional cost to Owner. 

4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m) for each type indicated. 


2.1 SELECTIONS OF CARPET TILE 

A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and material selections. 

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or 

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor 

conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by 

carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: 

Unless otherwise specified in Appendix A – Resilient Molding Accessories; provide the following moldings when required. 

Color: to be selected by the Architect. 

1. Carpet Edge Strip: 

a. Flexco - #184, Edge Guard 

b. Johnsonite - #EG-XX-L, Edge Guard 

c. Burkemercer - #700, Imperial Reducer 

d. Roppe - #39, Carpet Edge 

2. Carpet Reducer Strip: 

a. Flexco - #177B, Carpet Reducer 

b. Johnsonite - CRS-XX-B, Reducer 

c. Burkemercer - #146, Universal Reducer 

d. Roppe - #26, Reducer Strip 

3. Joiner Strip: 

a. Flexco - #167, Tile & Carpet Joiner 

b. Johnsonite - CTA-XX-A, Carpet-to-Tile Adaptor 

c. Burkemercer - #700, Imperial Reducer 

d. Roppe - #50 Tile/Carpet Joiner 




A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. 

Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. 

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may 

interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and 

moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

2. Subfloor are level with a maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10 feet non-cumulative. 

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 

C. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 

1. Subfloor are level with a maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10 feet non-cumulative. 

2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show 

through surface. 

D. For metal subfloors, verify the following: 

1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show 

through surface. 

E. For painted subfloors, verify the following: 

1. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. 

F. For raised access flooring systems, verify the following: 

1. Access floor complies with requirements specified in Division 10 Section "Access Flooring." 

2. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any. 

3. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of irregularities, gaps greater 

than 1/8 inch (3 mm), protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), and substances that may interfere with 

adhesive bond or show through surface. 

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's 

written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. 

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, 

holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide 

or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that 

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by 

carpet tile manufacturer. 


D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand 

painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately 

before applying adhesive. 

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. 

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer; unless otherwise specified in Appendix 

A. 

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. 

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, 

pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile 

manufacturer. 

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, 

and similar openings. 

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish 

flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 

H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access 

flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet 

tile manufacturer. 

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. 

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." 

C. Do not use Carpet Mask for carpet protection; it voids carpet tile manufacturer’s warranty. 

D. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the 

remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile 

manufacturer. 



SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Work required under this section consists of surface preparation, priming, painting, and finishing 

work necessary to complete Work indicated or reasonably implied on Drawings. 



1. Submit a complete list of products proposed for use, including identifying product names and 

catalog numbers. 

B. Samples: 

1. Submit 2 samples of each color and material selected. 

2. Samples shall be submitted on 12" x 12" hardboard and shall be labeled on back, identifying color 

name and number, manufacturer, and product name. 



1. When a product manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in 

manufacture with a minimum of 5 years experience. 

2. Applicator shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of painting materials and shall 

demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such application. Applicator shall 

employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience. 


1. Conform to applicable codes and ordinances for flame, fuel, smoke, and volatile organic compound 

(VOC) ratings requirements for finishes at time of application. 

1.04 FIELD SAMPLE 

A. Requirements: 

1. Contractor shall schedule meeting with Architect to review the first finished items. Review shall be 

scheduled so as not to impede the progress of the project but shall occur prior to purchase of 

materials. 

2. The first finished items of each color will be reviewed for color, texture and workmanship. 

3. The first acceptable item of each color will be used as the project standard. 

4. Field Samples shall be no smaller than 100 sq.ft.. Where two or more colors / finishes adjoin 

provide 100 sq. ft. of each. Provide as many adjoining materials as possible; ceiling tile, base, 

carpet, etc.. 

1.05 MAINTENANCE 

A. Extra Materials: 

1. Provide, in manufacturer's unopened original containers, 1 gallon of each top coat color and store 

where directed by Owner. These containers will constitute extra stock for Owner's future 

maintenance needs. 

2. Label each container with room locations in addition to manufacturer's label. 

PAINTING 09 91 00-1



A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material 

selections. 


A. Painting and Finishing Materials: 

1. Benjamin Moore 

2. Duron 

3. Glidden 

4. Pittsburgh Paints 

5. Sherwin Williams 




1. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished for conditions that will adversely affect execution, 

permanence, or quality of Work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through 

preparatory work. 

2. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes 

until moisture content of surface is below following limits: 

a. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12% maximum 

b. Unit Masonry and Concrete: 12% maximum 

c. Interior Wood: 15% maximum; in accordance with ASTM D2016 

d. Exterior Wood: 15% maximum; in accordance with ASTM D2016 

3. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable. 

Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 



1. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. Remove 

empty paint and coatings containers from Premises. 

2. Place cotton waste, cloths and other hazardous materials in containers, and remove from Premises 

daily. 

3. Provide drop cloths, shields, and other protective equipment. 

4. Protect elements surrounding work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 

5. As Work proceeds, promptly remove spilled, splashed, or splattered materials from surfaces. 

B. Surface Preparation: 

1. General Requirements: 

a. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, 

surface hardware, and fittings prior to starting. 

b. Surfaces to be painted or finished shall be clean, dry, smooth and free from dust and 

foreign matter which will adversely affect adhesion or appearance. 

c. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. 

PAINTING 09 91 00-2

3.03 APPLICATION 

d. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with a tri-sodium phosphate 

bleach solution acceptable to paint manufacturer. Rinse area with clean, clear water; 

allow surface to thoroughly dry. 

2. Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: 

a. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound. 

b. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes; dampen with clean, clear water and fill with thin 

layers of joint cement. 

3. Previously Painted Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: 

a. Surface defects shall be filled, sanded, and spot primed. Cracks and holes shall be cut 

back and doubled filled, sanded, and spot primed. 

b. Remove cracking, flaking, and peeling paint by light sanding and spot prime. 

c. Glossy surfaces shall be sanded or otherwise treated prior to application of coating 

systems. 

4. Metal Surfaces: 

a. Surfaces must be free of residual deposits of grease, rust, scale, dirt, dust, and oil. 

b. For shop primed surfaces, sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather 

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces. 

c. For surfaces not shop primed, remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Surfaces shall be 

cleaned with hand or power tools to produce a clean, smooth surface. Where heavy 

coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or abrasive grit blasting. 

Immediately apply prime coat as scheduled. 

d. Prepare surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames including tops, bottoms, and surfaces 

normally concealed from view as described above. 

5. Previously Finished MetalSurfaces: 

a. Remove surface contamination by solvent cleaning, steam or high pressure water to 

remove contamination and oils. Scrape and sand to remove loose paint. Feather edges 

to make patches inconspicuous. 

b. Surfaces shall be dulled by sanding. The surface shall be blown off with compressed air. 

6. Cast-In-Place and/or Precast Concrete Surfaces: 

a. Allow concrete to cure for 60 to 90 days prior to painting. 

b. Remove loose particles with stiff brush. 

c. Remove dirt, scale, efflorescence, powders, laitance, parting compounds, and other 

foreign matter. 

d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to 

dry. 

e. Wash stains caused by weathering or corroding metals with a sodium metasilicate 

solution after thoroughly wetting with clean, clear water; allow surface to thoroughly dry. 

f. Fill small surface pock marks and air holes with an exterior latex base prime and fill 

material. Thoroughly brush or rub over surface and let dry for not less than 24 hours 

before applying paint. 

7. Wood Surfaces: 

a. Sand wood surfaces and edges smooth and even before finishing or painting and 

between coats. Remove dust after each sanding. 

b. Remove residue from knots, pitch streaks, cracks, open joints and sappy spots. Knots 

shall be coated with a pigmented stain sealer prior to painting. Avoid use of shellac as 

an undercoat. 

c. Countersink nails and fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with tinted putty 

or wood filler after priming is dry and before second coat. 

d. Prior to installation, apply backprime to woodwork scheduled to receive a field applied 

painted finish. 

e. Seal top, bottom, and edges of wood doors to be painted with primer. 


PAINTING 09 91 00-3

1. Number of coats specified are minimum number acceptable. Sand lightly between coats to 

achieve required finish. Apply additional coats as necessary to provide a smooth, even application 

. 

2. Use deep base primers where required. 

3. Vary slightly color of successive paint coats. Allow each coat of paint, varnish and enamel to dry 

thoroughly before applying succeeding coats. 

4. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. 

5. Finish closets same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. 

6. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors same as faces of doors. 

7. Paint surfaces above ceilings and inside partitions, flat black, behind grilles and registers which are 

exposed to view or which reflect light. 

8. Paint mechanical items as follows: 

a. Paint, flat black, interior of ducts behind grilles and registers. 

b. Do not paint name plates or polished surfaces of equipment. Leave clean and free of 

paint. 

c. Paint hangers and supports for pipes in exposed areas. 


A. At completion of Work, touch-up and restore finishes where damaged. 

B. Defects in Finished Surfaces: 

1. When stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, correct defects and cover with 

additional coats until coating or paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. 

2. Correct defects visible from a distance of 5 feet. Runs shall not be permitted. 

3. Refinish whole wall where a portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. At completion of day's work, remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. 

B. Clean paint spots, oil and other soiling from prefinished surfaces and surfaces with integral finish. Use 

solvents for metal work which will not damage finished surface. 

C. Leave storage area clean and in same condition required for equivalent spaces in Project. 

3.06 SCHEDULE OF PAINT FINISHES 

A. Unless noted otherwise the following list of systems is to be used on this project. To define requirements for 

materials this specification lists a single product manufactured by a specific manufacturer. Similar products 

by other manufacturers listed above may be provided. 

B. Interior Coating Systems: 

1. Gypsum Board [Ceilings]: Flat finish 

a. First Coat: Latex Quick Dry Primer #201 

b. Second Coat: Regal Wall Satin #215 

c. Third Coat: same as second 

2. Gypsum Board [Walls]: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: Latex Quick Dry Primer #201 

b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319 


3. Previously Painted Gypsum Board: 

Same systems as above except primer only required at repairs. 

4. Wood: Natural finish 

a. First Coat: Quick dry Sanding Sealer #413 

b. Second Coat: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404 

PAINTING 09 91 00-4

c. Third Coat: same as second if required 

5. Wood: Transparent finish 

a. First Coat: Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain #241 

b. Second Coat: Quick dry Sanding Sealer #413 

c. Third Coat: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404 

6. Wood: Semi-Gloss opaque finish 

a. First Coat: Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217 

b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333 


7. Ferrous Metals: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Retard-X-Rust Inhibitive Latex Primer #162 



8. Ferrous Metals: Semi-gloss finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Retard-X-Rust Inhibitive Latex Primer #162 



9. Galvanized Metals: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155 



10. Galvanized Metals: Semi-gloss finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155 



11. Aluminum: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163 



12. Aluminum: Semi-gloss finish 

a. First Coat: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163 



13. Concrete Unit Masonry: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: MoorCraft Super-Hide Latex Block Filler #285 



14. Concrete Unit Masonry: Semi-gloss finish 

a. First Coat: MoorCraft Super-Hide Latex Block Filler #285 



15. Brick Masonry, Plaster, and Concrete: Eggshell finish 

a. First Coat: Latex Enamel Underbody #345 



16. Brick Masonry, Plaster, and Concrete: Semi-gloss finish 

a. First Coat: Latex Enamel Underbody #345 



17. Concrete Floors: (reduce first coat according to label directions) 

a. First Coat: Latex Floor & Patio Finish #122 

b. Second Coat: same as first 



PAINTING 09 91 00-5

SECTION 11 31 00 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Kitchen appliances 




B. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Manufacturer's Instructions: 

a. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures which shall be basis for accepting or 

rejecting actual installation procedures. 

C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 

1. Submit instructions for cleaning and maintaining appliances. Include a copy of instruction in 

Operation and Maintenance Data Manual. 



A. Residential Appliances: 

1. Amana 

2. ISE; In-Sink-Erator 

3. General Electric 

4. Kitchen-Aid Inc. 

5. Maytag 

6. Thermador/Waste King 

7. Whirlpool Corp. 

8. Manufacturers identified in Appendix B 

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Refer to Appendix B for schedule of Equipment. 




1. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section is to be performed; correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work. 


RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-1


A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provisions are made for interface with this 

portion of Work. 

B. Install appliances in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor components firmly into 

position in proper relation to work surfaces, floors, etc. 


A. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet. 

B. Upon completion of installation and hook-up to utilities, put operating components of appliances through at 

least 5 complete operating cycles, adjusting as necessary to secure optimum level of operation. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Promptly remove from Site, cartons and packing material associated with work of this section. 


RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-2

DGS OJS DSLBD 

ONE JUDICIARY SQUARE, 8 TH FLOOR 

APPENDIX A 

SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 

1.01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK - Section 06 40 00 

A. Plastic Laminate Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): PLAM-01 

a. Manufacturer: Formica 

b. Color: Glamour Cherry 6208-43 

c. Finish: Artisan Finish 



b. Color: White Drops 8824-58 

c. Finish: Matte Finish 



b. Color: Stop Red 8390-58 



a. Product: Melamine 

b. Color: White 


B. Cabinetry Hardware: 

1. Door /Drawer Pulls 

a. Type: Hafele 

b. Size: 50mm (2” nom.) center to center 

c. Finish: Polished Chrome 

d. Product: #124.02.220 

2.01 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS – Section 06 40 00 

A. Solid Surface Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): SS-01 

a. Manufacturer: DuPont 

b. Product: Corian 

c. Color: Witch Hazel 

3.01 GLAZING - Section 08 80 00 

A. Glazing Film Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): MF-1 

a. Manufacturer: 3M 

b. Product: Fasara Glass Decorative Films 

c. Type: Yamato SH2PT YA 

OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 05.08.13 

Appendix A-1

B. Glass Type Selection: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): GL-1 

a. Thickness: ½” 

b. Type: Clear Tempered 

c. Color: None 

4.01 TILE – Section 09 31 00 

A. Ceramic Tile Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CT-1 

a. Manufacturer: Architectural Ceramics 

b. Product: VitraArt Tranquil Glass Mosaics 

c. Composition: Glass 

d. Color: 50C1 040M IPC 

e. Grout Color: TBD – Contractor to provide samples for approval 

f. Size: 2”x2” 

5.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - Section 09 51 00 

A. Acoustical Ceiling Type Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): ACT-1 

a. Manufacturer: Armstrong 

b. Type: Match to Building Standard 

c. Size: 24” x 24” 

d. Grid: Match to Building Standard 

6.01 RESILIENT FLOORING - Section 09 65 00 

A. Vinyl Floor Tile Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): VCT-1 

a. Manufacturer: Armstrong 

b. Product: Striations BBT with BioStride 

c. Size: 12” x 24” 

d. Thickness: 1/8” 

e. Color: T3614 Bisque 

f. Lead Time: 4 weeks from order if not in stock 

2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): VCT-2 

g. Manufacturer: Armstrong 

h. Product: Migrations BBT with BioStride 

i. Size: 12” x 12” 

j. Thickness: 1/8” 

k. Color: T3503 Ashen Gray 

B. Resilient Molding Accessory Selections: 

3. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): TR-1(Carpet to VCT) 

a. Manufacturer: Schulter 

b. Profile: Schiene 

c. Color: Stainless Steel 304 

7.01 RESILIENT BASE - Section 09 65 00 


Appendix A-2

A. Resilient Base Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): RB-1 

a. Manufacturer: Johnsonite 

b. Type: Ecolibrium, Rubber Base 

c. Height: 4” 

d. Color: Grey Haze WG 

Note: Straight Resilient Base to be used over broadloom carpet. Cove Resilient Base to be used over 

resilient flooring. 

8.01 CARPET TILING – Section 09 68 13 

A. Carpet Tile Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CPT-1 

a. Manufacturer: Lees Carpet 

b. Style: Enthralled GT153 

c. Color: 954 Dazzled 

d. Size: 24” x 24” 

e. Install: Quarter Turn 

f. Contact: Chick Mandeville, chick_mandeville@mohawkind.com, 

703.818.8703 office / 202.251.8797 mobile 

2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CPT-2 

a. Manufacturer: Lees Carpet 

b. Style : CL759 

c. Color: B8098 

d. Size: 24” x 24” 

e. Installation: Quarter Turn 

f. Contact: Chick Mandeville, chick_mandeville@mohawkind.com, 

703.818.8703 office / 202.251.8797 mobile 

B. Carpet Installation: 

1. Direct Glue 

9.01 PAINTING - Section 09 91 00 

A. Paint Color Selections: 

1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-1 

a. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore 

b. Color: Wedding Veil 2125-70 

c. Finish: Eggshell 


a. Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams 

b. Color: SW6531 Indigo 




b. Color: Acadia White OC-38 



Appendix A-3



b. Color: Yellow Lotus 2021-50 

Finish: Eggshell 


a. Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams 

b. Color: SW7007 Ceiling Bright White 

c. Finish: Flat 


a. Manufacturer: 

b. Color: 

c. Finish: 

Note: All wall gypsum surfaces shall have an eggshell finish unless noted otherwise. All ceiling 

gypsum surfaces shall have a flat finish. 

10.01 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS - Section 10 65 20 

B. Operable Panel Partitions: 

Selection: 

a. Manufacturer: Hufcor 

b. Type: Series 632 Paired Panels 

Paired panel system w/ fabric face 

Manual Folding Panel Parition 

STC – 45 -47 

3” Top Sweep Seal and Bottom Retractable Horizontal 

Seal 

c. Panel Finish: Revelations, Matrix Moonstone 100-12 

Class ‘A’, UBC 8-2/42-2 Latex Backing, Teflon 

50 Yard Rolls, 54” Width 

d. Frame Finish: Gray 

e. Location: 870 & 871 Project Rooms 

END OF APPENDIX 


Appendix A-4

DGSOJS DSLBD 

ONE JUDICIARY SQUARE, 8 TH FLOOR 

APPENDIX B 

SCHEDULE OF APPLIANCES 

1.01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES – Section 11 31 00 


1. To define requirements for materials, size, and design, products of certain manufacturers 

have been listed. Equivalent products by manufacturers listed in Section 11 31 00 may 

be provided. 

B. Microwave: 

1. Drawing Designation: 01 

2. Manufacturer: Whirlpool 

3. Model No.: GT4175SPS 

4. Size: 13 17/32" h x 22 19/32” w x 17 5/16" d 

5. Color: Stainless Steel 

6. QTY: 2, Suite 850 

C. Garbage Disposal: 


2. Manufacturer: GE 1 Horsepower Continuous Feed Disposer 

3. Model No.: GFC1020F 

4. Horsepower: 1 HP 

5. Motor Speed: 2800 RPM 

6. Location: Suite 850 

D. Full Size Refrigerator with Icemaker and Water Filter: 


2. Manufacturer: Whirlpool 

3. Model No.: GB2FHDXWD 

4. Size: 32 5/8" W x 33 3/8"D x 69 15/16"H 


6. Door Edge Clearance: 4 ½” with handle, from wall 

7. Installation Clearance: Sides 1/8”, Top 1”, Back 1” 


E. Under Counter ADA Refrigerator: 


2. Manufacturer: Uline 

3. Model No.: ADA24RS-15 (Left Handed) 

4. Size: 23 15/16” W x 32”H x 23 ½”D 


6. Door Edge Clearance: 4 ½” with handle, from wall 

7. Installation Clearance: Refer to manufacturer specifications and coordinate w/ millworker 


F. Sink: 


2. Manufacturer: Elkay 

3. Model No.: Lustertone under mount single bowl ELUGAD Series_ADA 

Compliant 

4. Size: 21 ½” x 18 ½” x 5 ½” 

OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT 05.08.13 

Appendix B-1


6. QTY: 1, Suite 850 

G. Faucet ADA: 


2. Manufacturer: Kohler, Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Sink Faucet - ADA 

3. Model No.: K-647 

4. Size: 

5. Color: VS- Stainless Steel 

7. QTY: 1, Suite 850 

H. NOT USED: 


2. Manufacturer: 

3. Model No.: 

4. Size: 

5. Color: 

I. NOT USED 


2. Manufacturer: 

3. Model No.: 

4. Size: 

5. Color: 

6. Notes: 

7. QTY: 

J. Coffee Machine: Owner Provided 


2. Manufacturer: Tassimo Single Serve 

3. Model No.: 

4. Size: 

5. Notes: No water line required 

6. QTY: 1 in Suite 805 and 2 in Suite 850 

END OF APPENDIX 

OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT 05.08.13 

Appendix B-2

OJS Building Rules, Regulations, and Requirements 

One Judiciary Square 

441 4 th Street NW 

Washington, DC 20001 

The General Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the Building Rules, Regulations, and Requirements as 

outlined below, and shall include and be responsible for all costs that are indicated below as costs to DGS within the 

Cost of the Tenant build-out of suites for offices of DSLBD. 

Scheduled use of the loading dock requires at least 72 hours and is subject to availability, Mon – Fri, 7am – 

5:30pm (business hours) and 5:30pm -11pm (by special request to Building Management office, 202-727- 

3133). 

o 

DGS Construction: If anyone requires use of the dock outside of that time frame, it will require 

overtime engineer coverage at a rate of $81.51 per hour and would have to be arranged 72 hours in 

advance. Prospective bidders should include this cost in their bid price. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

All construction materials and goods must be removed by the contractor to include but not limited to large 

packing boxes, crates, pallets, debris, unwanted items, etc. Please do not leave any materials, debris or 

unwanted items on the loading dock. All construction debris must be removed daily. 

The loading dock is to be used for the transfer and delivery of goods and materials only. No space for use a 

dumpster is available. Long term parking on the dock is not permitted unless arranged and approved by the 

Building Management office, 202-727-3133. 

Work may be performed 24 hours a day. All work that could create a noise disturbance to tenants must be 

performed during non-business hours, Mon-Fri after 5:30pm and weekends (subject to review). Prospective 

bidders should include such cost in their bid price. 

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review all necessary drawings and send RFI, if they find that 

installation of any drywall of other accessories will limit the maintenance of any existing or newly installed 

equipment. All equipment in the area must have clear maintenance access. 

All carpet in the general area must be covered by heavy duty paper of plastic so that the carpet is not 

damaged or soiled. In the event it becomes damaged as judged by the Owner or Architect, it will be the 

responsibility of the Contractor to replace carpet of that area matching the existing carpet. 

During the pre-construction meeting or sooner, the OJS Chief Building Engineer and/or his designee, and 

the Building Manager will review the approved plans to ensure they are in accordance with the Building 

standards and do not impact building systems. Upon review and approval, a sign off by the Chief Building 

Engineer will be provided. 

All work that requires tie-in to building systems must be pre-arranged with the Building Manager and Building 

Engineer, 202-727-2585. Once installed, the work must be approved by DCRA and/or their designee with a 

signed copy of the Certificate of Occupancy provided to the Building Manager. 

o DGS Construction: Any requests to tie-in Fire, Sprinkler and related Building Emergency 

Notification systems must be contracted directly with the Building’s fire alarm and sprinkler systems 

contractors, Siemens and/or Guardian. This is not a Facilities/Building Management cost.All new 

systems installation shall be synchronized with existing systems. 

OPX – Project No. 3191 Building Rules, Regs, Requirements -1 of 2 05.08.13

OJS Building Rules and Regulations 

 

 

Passenger elevators are not to be used to haul or transport materials and goods. The freight elevators 

located on the north and south side can be used for this purpose and subject to availability. Use of the 

freight elevator must be pre-arranged with the Building Management office, 202-727-3133. 

OJS has a restrictive key way system and the bitting must be maintained. DGS FD will provide a letter of 

authorization for the purchase of locks, cores, key blanks and/or keys by the contractor. Please contact the 

Building Manager to request authorization, 202-727-2585. 

o 

o 

o 

o 

DGS Construction:The cost to key the newly constructed offices to OJS’ key way system must be 

included in Construction costs. 

Contractor shall be responsible to install a lock box and populate that with keys with distinct door 

numbers so that it is easy to identify all keys of the entire suit. Contractor must consider this cost in 

their pricing. 

All door locks shall be Schlage, Commercial grade to match building standard. GC shall provide 

Master Keying to match building Masters. 

All Door Hardware shall match building standard 

 

During the demolition work the contractor must: 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

Protect the area within their scope so that dust does not enter in vicinity suites; 

Demolition work must be conducted during close of business hours; 

If required by the drawings, installation, relocation, and programming of any VAV boxes shall be 

coordinated with the Building Engineer in order to stay compatible with the existing Building 

Management System. Please see mechanical details for more clarification. EASI Controls has 

programmed all VAV boxes in the building. EASI can be reached at 877-538-3274. 

All work that requires tie-in to building systems must be pre-arranged with the Building Manager 

and Building Engineer (202-727-2585). Once installed, the work must be approved by DCRA 

and/or their designee with a signed copy of the Certificate of Occupancy provided to the Building 

Manager. 

The Contractor shall keep the air handling units filters clean during construction. Fixing all 

damages to the air handling units due to dust will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Upon 

Substantial completion, the contractor shall install new filters for the air handling units servicing the 

construction area. 

 

It will be the responsibility of the contractor to conduct all due diligence before proceeding with such work. 

That includes, 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

At a minimum, x-ray/GPR of the affected area before conducting drilling/channeling work; 

All types of x-ray/GPR work must be performed outside of business hours; 

Schedule the x-ray/GPF work with the Facility Engineer by providing notices at least 72 hours 

before the actual work; 

Result of x-ray/GPR must be provide to the AE with a copy to the Project Manager and get 

approval before conducting the actual work; 

Core Drilling/Channeling work must be performed outside of business hours. 

END 

DGS OJS Page 2 of 2 05.08.13 

OPX – Project No. 3191

DSLBD Office Fit Out - Broughton Construction Company

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?